Omron CIMR-E7Z4090 User manual

Refer to the numbers indicated in

Fig 2.2

When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.

DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)

U X

Short-circuit bar

Fuse

Main contactor

1 2

Varispeed E7

Motor

3-phase power supply

380 to 480 V

50/60 Hz

Line

Filter

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

CIMR-

E7Z47P51

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Fault contact output

250 VAC, 1 A max.

30 VDC, 1 A max.

Multi-function digital inputs

[Factory settings]

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

External fault

Fault reset

Multi-step speed setting 1

Multi-step speed setting 2

Jog frequency selection

24V

E(G)

Shield terminal

Contact output 1

[Default: During run]

Contact output 2

[Default: Zero speed]

Shield terminal

E(G)

Multi-function digital output

250 VAC, 1 A max.

30 VDC, 1 A max.

2k Ω

Adjustment

0 to 10V

4 to 20mA

Analog input power supply

+15 V, 20 mA

Analog input 1: Master frequency reference

Multi-function analog input 1:

[Default: Frequency Bias

4 to 20 mA (250 )]

-V

Analog input power supply

-15 V, 20 mA

Adjustment,

20 k

Multi-function analog output 1

(0 to 10 V, 2 mA)

[Default: Output frequency , 0 to 10 V]

Adjustment,

20 k

Multi-function analog output 2

(0 to 10 V, 2 mA)

[Default: Output power, 0 to 10 V]

Input Option Cards

Terminating resistance

MEMOBUS communication

RS-485/422

R+

R-

S+

S-

Shielded wires P

Twisted-pair shielded wires

Fig 2.1 Connection Diagram of IP20 Inverters (Model CIMR-E7Z47P51 Shown Above)

Connection Diagrams

3-phase power supply

380 to 480 V

50/60 Hz

Fuse

Multi-function digital inputs

[Factory settings]

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

External fault

Fault reset

Multi-step speed setting 1

Multi-step speed setting 2

Jog frequency selection

Main contactor

DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)

U X

Short-circuit bar

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

1 2

Varispeed E7

CIMR-E7Z47P52

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

2kΩ

Adjustment

0 to 10V

4 to 20mA

Motor

24V

E(G)

Shield terminal

Fault contact output

250 VAC, 1 A max.

30 VDC, 1 A max.

Contact output 1

[Default: During run]

Contact output 2

[Default: Zero speed]

Multi-function digital output

250 VAC, 1 A max.

30 VDC, 1 A max.

Analog input power supply

+15 V, 20 mA

Analog input 1: Master frequency reference

0 to 10 V (20 k )

Multi-function analog input 1:

[Default: Frequency Bias

4 to 20 mA (250 )]

-V

Analog input power supply

-15 V, 20 mA

Shield terminal

E(G)

Adjustment,

20 k

Multi-function analog output 1

(0 to 10 V, 2 mA)

[Default: Output frequency, 0 to 10 V]

Adjustment,

20 k

Multi-function analog output 2

(0 to 10 V, 2 mA)

[Default: Output power, 0 to 10 V]

Input Option Cards

MEMOBUS communication

RS-485/422

R+

R-

S+

S-

Terminating resistance

Shielded wires

Twisted-pair shielded wires

Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram of IP54 Inverters (Model CIMR-E7Z47P52 Shown Above)

2-3

2-4

Circuit Descriptions

Fig 2.1

page 2-33, Sinking/Sourcing Mode

Fig 2.2

These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation.

These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-

SELV

circuits, but not both.

Inverter supplied by four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)

These circuits are SELV

circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV

(or equivalent) circuits.

Inverter supplied by three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)

These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation.

* SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) circuits have no direct connection to the primary power and are supplied by a transformer or equivalent isolating device. The circuits are designed and protected, so that, under normal and fault condition, its voltage does not exceed a safe value. (See IEC 61010)

1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.

IMPORTANT

2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.

4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 is shown for the connection of relay contacts or NPN transistors (0V common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.

For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to

5. The master speed frequency reference can be input either at terminal A1 or at terminal A2 by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is terminal A2.

6. DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 110 kW and 400

V Class Inverters from 22 up to 300 kW. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.

Terminal Block Configuration

The terminal arrangements are shown in

Fig 2.3

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in

Fig 2.4

E(G)

SN SC

S1 S2

SP A1

S3 S4

+V AC

S6 S7

-V

P AC

R+

S+

R-

S-

M5 M6

E(G

)

Control Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Terminals

NOT USED

Charge Indicator

Ground Terminal

Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200V / 400V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW)

E(G)

SN SC

+V AC

S5 S6 S7

-V MP

AM IG

R+

S+

R-

S-

MA MB

M2 E(G)

Control Circuit Terminals

Carge Indicator

Main Circuit Terminals

Ground Terminals

Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200V / 400V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)

2-5

2-6

Control Terminals

Output Terminals

NOT USED

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

+1 +2 U/T1

MOTOR

V/T2 W/T3

CAUTION Terminal tightening torque;

Refer to manual for connections.

Use 75°C Cu wires or equivalent.

M5:2.5N.m

M6:4.0-5.0N.m

NPJU30012-1-1

Input Terminals

Ground Terminals

Fig 2.5 Terminal Arrangement (IP54 Inverter of 18.5kW)

Control Terminals

Shielding Clamp for Control Cables

Input Terminals

R/L1 S/L2 S/L3

Output Terminals

Ground Terminals

Fig 2.6 Terminal Arrangement (IP54 Inverter of 37kW)

Shielding Clamp for Motor Cables

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Applicable Wire Sizes and Crimp Terminals

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from the following tables.

Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

Terminal Symbol

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

E7Z20P4

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5

(14)

Wire Type

E7Z20P7

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z21P5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5

(14)

2.5

(14)

E7Z22P2

E7Z23P7

E7Z25P5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

M4 1.2 to 1.5

(12 to 10)

M4 1.2 to 1.5

(10)

E7Z27P5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z2011

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z2015

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/

T2, W/T3

B1, B2

E7Z2018

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/

T2, W/T3

B1, B2

E7Z2022

E7Z2030

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

M5 2.5

(8 to 6)

M5 2.5

4.0 to 5.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

(6 to 4)

(4 to 2)

(8 to 6)

(4)

25 to 35

(3 to 2)

(8 to 6)

(4)

25 to 35

(3 to 1)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

(1 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

(8)

(6)

(4)

(1)

(4)

(3)

(4)

(3)

(14)

(12)

(10)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

2-7

2-8

Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

E7Z2037

E7Z2045

E7Z2055

E7Z2075

E7Z2090

E7Z2110

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/l1,

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,

V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/l1,

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,

3 r/l1,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/l1,

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,

1 U/T1,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/l1,

Δ/l2

Δ/l2 r/l1,

Δ/l2

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

Terminal

Screws

M10

M12

M10

M12

M10

M12

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

17.6 to 22.5

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75

°C.The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

(2/0)

70 to 95

(2/0 to 4/0)

6 to 16

(10 to 4)

35 to 70

(2 to 2/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

(3/0 to 4/0)

95 to 122

(3/0 to 250)

(3/0 to 4/0)

6 to 70

(10 to 2/0)

95 to 185

(3/0 to 400)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

150 to 185

(250 to 400)

95 to 150

(4/0 to 300)

6 to 70

(10 to 2/0)

70 to 150

(2/0 to 300)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

6 to 16

(10 to 4)

50 to 70

(1 to 2/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

50 to 95

(1/0 to 4/0)

(4/0)

6 to 70

(10 to 2/0)

35 to 95

(3 to 4/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

–

(2)

1.5

(16)

(3/0)

240 to 300

(350 to 600)

150 to 300

(300 to 600)

6 to 70

(10 to 2/0)

150

(300)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

Wire Type

–

(1)

1.5

(16)

× 2P

(1/0

× 2P)

(4/0)

–

(1/0)

1.5

(16)

× 2P

(3/0

× 2P)

× 2P

(3/0

× 2P)

–

(3/0)

1.5

(16)

150

× 2P

(250

× 2P)

× 2P

(4/0

× 2P)

–

× 2P

(2/0

× 2P)

1.5

(16)

240

× 2P, or

× 4P

(350

× 2P, or

1/0

× 2P)

150

× 2P, or

× 4P

(300

× 2P, or

1/0

× 4P)

–

150

× 2P

(300

× 2P)

1.5

(16)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

E7Z40P4

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes, NEMA 1/ IP20 and IP00 Inverters

Terminal Symbol

Terminal

Screws

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5

(14)

Wire Type

E7Z40P7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5

(14)

E7Z41P5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5

(14)

E7Z42P2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5

1.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

E7Z43P7

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z44P0

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z45P5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z47P5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z4011

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z4015

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

E7Z4018

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/

T2, W/T3

B1, B2

E7Z4022

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/

T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

E7Z4030

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/

T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

1.2 to 1.5

2.5

(M6)

2.5

(4.0 to 5.0)

4.0 to 5.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

2.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

2.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

(12 to 10)

2.5 to 4

(14 to 10)

(10)

(12 to 10)

6 to 10

(10 to 6)

(8 to 6)

6 to 10

(10 to 6)

10 to 35

(8 to 2)

(8)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

(6 to 4)

16 to 25

(6 to 2)

(4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

2.5

(14)

(8)

(10)

(12)

(8)

(10)

(6)

(4)

(12)

2.5

(14)

(12)

2.5

(14)

(12)

2.5

(14)

(10)

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

2-9

2-10

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

E7Z4037

E7Z4045

E7Z4055

E7Z4075

E7Z4090

E7Z4110

E7Z4132

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/

T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/

T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes, NEMA 1/ IP20 and IP00 Inverters

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

Terminal

Screws

M10

M12

M10

M12

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

31.4 to 39.2

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

17.6 to 22.5

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

31.4 to 39.2

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

(2)

25 to 50

(4 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

35 to 50

(2 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

(1 to 1/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

25 to 35

(4 to 2)

70 to 95

(2/0 to 4/0)

50 to 100

(1/0 to 4/0)

6 to 16

(10 to 4)

35 to 70

(2 to 2/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

(3/0 to 4/0)

10 to 16

(8 to 4)

50 to 95

(1 to 4/0)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

50 to 95

(1/0 to 4/0)

10 to 70

(8 to 2/0)

70 to 150

(2/0 to 300)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

(3/0 to 4/0)

75 to 95

(2/0 to 4/0)

10 to 70

(8 to 2/0)

95 to 150

(4/0 to 300)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

(4)

(2)

(4)

(1)

(4)

(2/0)

(1/0)

(2)

1.5

(16)

(4/0)

(1)

1.5

(16)

× 2P

(1/0

× 2P)

(2/0)

1.5

(16)

× 2P

(3/0

× 2P)

× 2P

(2/0

× 2P)

(4/0)

1.5

(16)

Wire Type

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Inverter

Model

CIMR-

E7Z4160

E7Z4185

E7Z4220

E7Z4300

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

3 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33

3 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33

3 r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes, NEMA 1/ IP20 and IP00 Inverters

Terminal Symbol r/l1,

Δ200/ l2

200,

Δ400/ l2

400

Terminal

Screws

M12

M16

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

31.4 to 39.2

8.8 to 10.8

31.4 to 39.2

1.3 to 1.4

78.4 to 98

1.3 to 1.4

78.4 to 98

1.3 to 1.4

78.4 to 98

1.3 to 1.4

Possible

Wire Sizes mm

(AWG)

95 to 185

(4/0 to 400)

95 to 185

(3/0 to 400)

10 to 70

(8 to 2/0)

50 to 150

(1/0 to 300)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

× 2P

(4/0

× 2P)

× 2P

(3/0

× 2P)

95 to 300

(4/0 to 600)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

95 to 300

(4/0 to 600)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

95 to 300

(4/0 to 600)

0.5 to 4

(20 to 10)

× 2P

(1/0

× 2P)

1.5

(16)

150

× 2P

(300

× 2P)

120

× 2P

(250

× 2P)

300

× 2P

(600

× 2P)

–

× 2P

(3/0

× 2P

1.5

(16)

240

× 2P

(500

× 2P)

240

× 2P

(400

× 2P)

120

× 4P

(250

× 4P)

–

120

× 2P

(250

× 2P)

1.5

(16)

120

× 4P

(250

× 4P)

120

× 4P

(4/0

× 4P)

240

× 4P

(400

× 4P)

–

120

× 2P

(250

× 2P

1.5

(16)

Wire Type

Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables

2-11

2-12

Inverter Model

CIMR-

E7Z47P52

E7Z40112

E7Z40152

E7Z40182

E7Z40222

E7Z40302

E7Z40372

E7Z40452

E7Z40552

Table 2.3 400 V Class Wire Sizes, IP54 Inverters

Terminal Symbol

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

OUTPUT (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

OUTPUT (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

OUTPUT

( )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

OUTPUT (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

OUTPUT

( )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

OUTPUT

( )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

OUTPUT

( )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

OUTPUT

( )

INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, )

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

OUTPUT

( )

Terminal

Screws

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

Tightening

Torque

(N•m)

2.5

1.8

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

Cable Gland size

Possible

Clamping Cable

Diam.

(mm)

Minimum

Diam Over

Braid Shield

(mm)

M32 (Plastic) 11 to 21 -

6 M32 (Metal) 11 to 21 9.0

1.8

2.5

M32 (Plastic) 11 to 21

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

M32 (Metal)

11 to 21

M32 (Plastic) 11 to 21

11 to 21

9.0

2.5

4.0 to 5.0

9.0 to 10.0

M32 (Plastic) 11 to 21

M32 (Metal) 11 to 21

M40 (Plastic) 19 to 28

M40 (Metal) 19 to 28

9.0

15.0

M40 (Plastic) 19 to 28

M40 (Metal)

19 to 28

M50 (Plastic) 19 to 28

M50 (Metal)

M50 (Plastic) 19 to 28

M50 (Metal)

19 to 28

M50 (Plastic) 19 to 28

19 to 28

15.0

Table 2.4 Recommended Wire Types for IP54 Inverters

INPUT

OUTPUT

(-), (+1)

4-core Power Cable

4-core shielded Power Cable

e.g. 600V Vinyl Power Cable

*1. 4-core power cables or 4-core shielded power cables are available e.g. Lappkabel (Ölflex) or Pirelli

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Table 2.5 Tightening Torques for Cable Gland

Cable Gland Size

M16

M20

M25

M32

M40

M50

Tightening Torque (Nm)

Plastic Metal

3.0

6.0

10.0

12.0

8.0

10.0

13.0

15.0

12.0

18.0

20.0

IMPORTANT

Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage.

Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:

Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10

-3

2-13

2-14

Recommended Crimp Terminals

Table 2.6 Recommended Crimp Terminals

Wire Cross Section

(mm²)

0.5-1.0

1.5

2.5

120

150

240

Terminal Screws

300

*1. not applicable for E7Z2011

M12

M10

M12

M16

M10

M12

M10

M12

M16

M12

M16

M12

M16

107 R/12

108 R/10

108 R/12

108 R/16

109 R/12

109 R/16

110 R/12

110 R/16

105 R/6

105 R/8

105 R/10

106 R/8

106 R/10

106 R/12

107 R/8

107 R/10

112 R/12

112 R/16

113 R/16

101 R/8

102 R/5

102 R/6

102 R/8

103 R/5

103 R/6

103 R/8

104 R/6

104 R/8 a

620/4

630/4

650/4

101 R/5

101 R/6

Recommended Crimp Terminals

Klauke y b

1620/4

1630/4

1650/4

1650/5

1650/6

1650/8

1652/5

1652/6

1652/8

1653/5

1656/10

1656/12

1657/8

1657/10

1657/12

1658/10

1658/12

1658/16

1653/6

1653/8

1654/6

1654/8

1655/6

1655/8

1655/10

1656/8

1659/12

1659/16

1660/12

1660/16

1662/12

1662/16

JST

GS4-1

GS4-2.5

GS4-6

GS5-6

GS6-6

GS8-6

GS5-10

GS6-10

GS8-10

GS5-16

GS10-50

GS12-50

GS8-70

GS10-70

GS12-70

GS10-95

GS12-95

GS16-95

GS6-16

GS8-16

GS6-25

GS8-25

GS6-35

GS8-35

GS10-35

GS8-50

GS12-120

GS16-120

GS12-150

GS16-150

GS12-240

GS16-240

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in

Table 2.7

. Wire the termi-

nals correctly for the desired purposes.

Table 2.7 Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Purpose

Main circuit power input

Inverter outputs

DC bus terminals

DC reactor connection

Terminal Symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

1, 2

Model: CIMR-E7Z

200 V Class

20P4 to 2110

2022 to 2110

20P4 to 2110

20P4 to 2018

400 V Class

40P4 to 4300

4022 to 4300

40P4 to 4300

40P4 to 4018

Braking Unit connection

2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300

Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300

2-15

2-16

Main Circuit Configurations

Table 2.8

Table 2.8 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations (IP00, NEMA 1/IP20 Inverters)

200 V Class 400 V Class

CIMR-E7Z20P4 to 2018

B1 B2

CIMR-E7Z40P4 to 4018

B1 B2

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

CIMR-E7Z2022 to 2030

CIMR-E7Z4022 to 4055

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

CIMR-E7Z4075 to 4300

+ 3

CIMR-E7Z2037 to 2110

+ 3

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

r/l

1 s 200/l

200

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

r/l

1 s 200/l

200 s 400/l

400

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Note: Consult your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative before using 12-phase rectification.

400/200

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Table 2.9 Main Circuit Configurations (IP54 Inverters)

400 V class

CIMR-E7Z47P52 to 40182

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

EMC filter

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Power supply

Control circuits

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

EMC

Filter

CIMR-E7Z40222 to 40552

Power

Supply

Control

Circuits

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

2-17

2-18

Standard Connection Diagrams

Standard Inverter (NEMA 1 / IP20) connection diagrams are shown in

Fig 2.7

. These are the same for both

200 V Class and 400 V Class Inverters.

Fig 2.8

shows the standard Inverter connection diagrams for the IP54

Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.

CIMR-E7Z20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018

CIMR-E7Z2022, 2030 and 4022 to 4055

Braking

Resistor (optional)

CDBR Braking

Unit (optional)

Braking

Resistor (optional)

CDBR Braking

Unit (optional)

3 Phase 200VAC or

400VAC

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

+ 1

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

DC reactor

(optional)

+ 2

3 Phase 200VAC or

400VAC

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31

+ 3 -

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.

The DC reactor is built in.

CIMR-E7Z2037 to 2110

3 Phase 200VAC or

400VAC

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

+ 3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31 r / l1

/ l2

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Braking

Resistor (optional)

CDBR Braking

Unit (optional)

CIMR-E7Z4075 to 4300

3 Phase 200VAC or

400VAC

+ 1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

+ 3

R1/L11

S1/L21

T1/L31 r / l1

200 / l

200

400 / l

400

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Braking

Resistor (optional)

CDBR Braking

Unit (optional)

Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.

Fig 2.7 Main Circuit Terminal Connections for NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

CIMR-E7Z47P72 to 4055

Braking

Resistor (optional)

CDBR Braking

Unit (optional)

+ 1

DC reactor

(optional)

+ 2

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

3 Phase 400VAC

Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.

Fig 2.8 Main Circuit Terminal Connections for IP54 Inverters

2-19

2-20

Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.

Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.

4110

4132

4160

4185

4220

4300

4022

4030

4037

4045

4055

4075

4090

40P4

40P7

41P5

42P2

43P7

44P0

45P5

47P5

4011

4015

4018

Installing Fuses

To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.

Table 2.10 Input Fuses

20P4

20P7

21P5

22P2

23P7

25P5

27P5

2011

2015

2018

2022

2030

2037

2045

2055

2075

2090

2110

Inverter Type

Rated Inverter

Output

Current (A)

3.2

4.1

7.0

9.6

115

145

180

215

283

346

415

Voltage (V)

240

Fuse Selection

Current (A)

100

130

150

180

240

300

350

450

550

600

2 t (A

2 s)

12~25

23~55

34~98

82~220

220~610

290~1300

450~5000

1200~7200

1800~7200

870~16200

1500~23000

2100~19000

2700~55000

4000~55000

7100~64000

11000~64000

13000~83000

Selection Example (Ferraz)

Model Rating

2 t (A

2 s)

A60Q12-2

A60Q15-2

A60Q20-2

A60Q30-2

A50P50-4

A50P80-4

A50P125-4

A50P150-4

A50P200-4

A50P250-4

A50P300-4

A50P350-4

A50P450-4

A50P600-4

600V / 12A

600V / 15A

600V / 20A

600V / 30A

500V / 50A

500V / 80A

500V / 125A

500V / 150A

500V / 200A

500V/ 250A

500V / 300A

500V / 350A

500V / 450A

500V / 600A

250

640

1600

2200

132

4000

6200

9000

12000

20000

36000

216

260

304

370

506

675

112

150

180

7.6

8.7

12.5

1.8

2.1

3.7

5.3

480

350

400

450

600

700

900

100

125

150

250

300

6~55

10~55

18~55

34~72

50~570

100~570

100~640

150~1300

400~1800

700~4100

A60Q10-2

A60Q12-2

A60Q15-2

A60Q20-2

A60Q30-2

A70P50-4

A70P70-4

A70P80-4

240~5800

500~5800

750~5800

920~13000

1500~13000

3000~55000

3800~55000

A70P80-4

A70P100-4

A70P125-4

A70P150-4

A70P200-4

A70P250-4

A70P300-4

5400~23000 A70P350-4

7900~64000 A70P400-4

14000~250000 A70P450-4

20000~250000 A70P600-4

34000~400000 A70P700-4

52000~920000 A70P900-4

600V / 10A

600V / 12A

600V / 15A

600V / 20A

600V / 30A

700V / 50A

700V / 70A

700V / 80A

700V / 100A

700V / 125A

700V / 150A

700V / 200A

700V / 250A

700V / 300A

700V / 350A

700V / 400A

700V / 450A

700V / 600A

700V / 700A

700V / 900A

770

1200

1900

2700

4800

7500

11000

15000

19000

24000

43000

59000

97000

132

300

590

770

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker

When connecting the power input terminals (R/L2, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.

•

Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.

•

For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at

150% of the rated output current).

Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage breaker should be used, select a breaker that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.

•

For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.

•

When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.

The following things should be considered:

•

The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.

Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.

Do not exceed one power up per hour.

•

When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.

Installing an Input AC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing capacitor is switched nearby, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter unit to break down.

To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.

This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.

2-21

2-22

Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.

Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.

Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.

Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the

Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.

Using a Magnetic Contactor

Check the control sequence to make sure, that the magnetic contactor (MC) between the Inverter and motor is not turned ON or OFF during inverter operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s overcurrent protection may operate. If the MC is turned

OFF while the Inverter is operating a large induced voltage may occur and damage the inverter output parts.

Installing a Thermal Overload Relay Contact for Motor Protection

This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The control circuit should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs.

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in

Table 2.11

. (For details, refer to

Chapter 5, User Parameters

Table 2.11 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

Cable length

Carrier frequency

50 m max.

15 kHz max.

100 m max.

10 kHz max.

More than 100 m

5 kHz max.

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Ground Wiring

Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.

•

Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100

Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10

Ω.

•

Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.

•

Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.

Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.

•

When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

Fig 2.9 Ground Wiring

Connecting a Braking Unit (CDBR) and a Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB)

Connect a Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit to the Inverter as shown in the

Fig 2.10

The Braking Resistor Unit will not work if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration). Hence the deceleration time may be longer than the set time (C1-02/04).

To prevent the braking unit/braking resistor unit from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the

inverter output using the thermal overload relay of the Unit as shown in

Fig 2.10

CDBR

Braking Unit

Braking Resistor

+ 3

Inverter

Thermal

Overload

Relay Contact

- 0

Thermal Overload

Relay Contact

Fig 2.10 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit

2-23

2-24

Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in

Fig

2.11

. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).

Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact

Braking

Resistor

Unit

Braking

Resistor

Unit

Braking

Resistor

Unit

Inverter

Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3

Braking Unit #1

Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact

Fig 2.11 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

Thermal overload relay contact

Wiring the Power Cables of IP54 Inverters

Special attention has to be paid for wiring the motor cables of the IP54 inverters. The smaller capacities feature an EMC cable gland which is used to earth the motor cable shield easily.

Installing the Metal (EMC) Cable Gland on IP54 Inverters 7.5 to 30kW

1. With the Standard Contacting:

Make a round cut into the outer sheath, with a length of appr. 14mm from the end of the sheath but do not remove the sheath.

Guide the cable through the gland. appr. 15 mm

Pull off the cut-off outer sheath, remove some part of the shield and pull the cable back until the shield has proper contact to the springs of the cable gland.

Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Close the cable gland.

2. With thin wires and without an inner sheath

Make a round cut into the sheath, with a length of appr. 15 to 20mm and remove it.

Pull back the braided shield over the outer sheath, the inner shield should be kept for easier guiding through the gland.

Guide the cable through the gland until the shield has proper contact to the springs of the cable gland and close the cable gland. appr. 15 to 20 mm

Note:

To ensure conformity to EMC regulations the shielded cable has to be locked tightly by the metal cable gland.

Confirm the cable length and the terminal specifications before fitting the metal cable gland.

2-25

Special Considerations for IP54 Inverters of 22 and 30kW capacity

Install the shielded output cable as shown in the

Fig 2.12

Remove the braided shield on the output cable entirely from the entry hole to the terminal end to avoid short circuit to the input terminals or the filter.

Remove the braided shield entirely from the entry hole to the terminal end.

Input Cable

Output Cable

(Shielded Cable)

Fig 2.12 Motor Cable Installation for IP54 Inverters of 22 and 30kW

Installing the Motor Cable at IP54 Inverters of 37 to 55kW capacity

Install the shielded output cable as shown in the figure below. Remove the outer sheath and clamp the braided shield by the earth clamp.

2-26

Earth Plate

Remove the outer sheath and clamp the braided shield by the earth clamp

Earth Clamp Output Cable

Fig 2.13 Motor Cable Installation for IP54 Inverters of 37 to 55kW

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Wire Sizes

For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.

When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.

Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in

Table 2.12

Table 2.12 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all models)

Terminals

Terminal

Screws

Tightening Torque

(N•m)

Possible

Wire

Sizes mm

(AWG)

Recommended

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

IP54 Inverters Only

Cable

Gland

Size

Possible

Clamping

Cable

Diam.

(mm)

FM, AC, AM, SC, SP,

SN, A1, A2, +V, -V,

S1, S2, S3, S4,

S5, S6, S7

MA, MB, MC, M1,

M2, M3, M4,

R+, R-, S+, S-, IG

Phoenix type

0.5 to 0.6

Single wire

0.14 to 2.5

Stranded wire:

0.14 to 1.5

(26 to 14)

0.75

(18)

M25

9 to 17

Wire Type

• Shielded, twistedpair wire

• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable

E (G) M3.5

0.8 to 1.0

0.5 to 2

(20 to 14)

1.25

(12)

*1. We recommend using cable-end sleeves on signal lines to simplify wiring and to improve reliability.

*2. Refer to

Table 2.5

for tightening torques for the cable glands.

*3. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.

2-27

Cable-End Sleeves for Signal Lines

Models and sizes of straight solderless terminals are shown in the following table.

Table 2.13 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Wire Size mm

(AWG)

0.25 (24)

0.5 (20)

0.75 (18)

1.25 (16)

2 (14)

Model

AI 0.25 - 8YE

AI 0.5 - 8WH

AI 0.75 - 8GY

AI 1.5 - 8BK

AI 2.5 - 8BU d1

0.8

1.1

1.3

1.8

2.3

2.5

2.8

3.4

4.2

12.5

Manufacturer

Phoenix Contact

2-28

Fig 2.14 Cable-End Sleeve Size

Wiring Method

Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.

1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.

2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.

3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly

Screwdriver

Blade of screwdriver

Control circuit terminal block

Strip the end for

7 mm if no cableend sleeve is used.

Wires

Solderless terminal or wire without soldering

3.5 mm max.

Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

Fig 2.15 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Earthing the Control Cable Shield in IP54 Inverters

For a appropriate shielding earth clamps have been mounted in the IP54 inverters.

Fig 2.16

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in

Fig 2.17

show where the earth clamps can be found.

Control Terminal

Cable Mounting Base

Earth Clamp

Fig 2.16 Earth Clamp of IP54 Inverters with 7.5 to 18.5kW capacity

Control

Terminal

Earth Clamp

Cable Tie

(optional)

Earth Clamp

Cable

Mounting

Base

Control Cable

Fig 2.17 Earth clamp of IP54 Inverters with 22 to 55kW

Cable Gland

2-29

2-30

Use the following procedure to clamp and shield the control cables in the IP54 Inverters.

Loosen both mounting screws for the earth clamp

Insert the shielded cable for control between earth clamp and cable mounting base

Tighten the screws alternately until screws are fixed to the end.

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in

Table 2.14

Table 2.14 Control Circuit Terminals with Default Settings

Type No.

Signal Name

S1 Forward run/stop command

S2 Reverse run/stop command

External fault input

Fault reset

SC Digital input common

SN Digital Input Neutral

Multi-step speed reference 1

(Master/auxiliary switch)

Multi-step speed reference 2

Jog frequency reference

+V 15 V power output

A1 Frequency reference

Fault output signal

Digital Input Power Supply

A2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference

-V -15 V power output

AC Analog reference common

E(G)

Shield wire, optional ground line connection point

During run

(1NO contact)

Zero speed

(1NO contact)

Function

Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.

Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.

Fault when ON.

Reset when ON

Auxiliary frequency reference when ON.

Multi-step speed 2 when

ON.

Jog frequency when ON.

–

Functions are selected by setting H1-01 to

H1-05.

+24VDC power supply for digital inputs

15 V power supply for analog references

0 to +10 V/100%

Auxiliary analog frequency reference;

4 to 20 mA (250

Ω)

Function is selected by setting H3-09.

-15 V power supply for analog references

–

Closed during Run

CLOSED when output frequency at zero level

(b2-01) or below

24 VDC, 8 mA

Photocoupler isolation

–

24 VDC, 250 mA max.

15 V (Max. curr.: 20mA)

0 to +10 V (20 k

Ω)

4 to 20 mA (250

Ω)

0 V to +10 V (20k

Ω)

0 to 20 mA (250

Ω)

–

Signal Level

Function selected by H2-01 and

H2-02

Relay contacts

Contact capacity:

1 A max. at 250 VAC

1 A max. at 30 VDC

CLOSED across MA and MC during faults

OPEN across MB and MC during faults

Output frequency

Analog common

Inverter output power

Analog output frequency signal;

0 to 10 V; 10V=FMAX

–

Analog output power signal;

0 to 10V; 10V=max. appl. motor capacity

Function selected by H4-01

Function selected by H4-04

0 to +10 V max. ±5%

2 mA max.

2-31

2-32

Type

Table 2.14 Control Circuit Terminals with Default Settings

No.

Signal Name

R+

MEMOBUS communications

Rinput

S+

MEMOBUS communications

Soutput

IG Signal common –

Function

For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-.

Signal Level

Differential input, PHC isolation

–

*1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting

1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.

*2. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.

*3. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in

Fig 2.18

Flywheel diode

External power:

30 VDC max.

Coil

1 A max.

The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.

Fig 2.18 Flywheel Diode Connection

Switch S1 - Standard Terminal Board

The Switch S1 can be used to terminate the internal RS422/485 port and for selecting the input signal type for analog input A2. See

Fig 2.19

for details.

Off

V I

RS422/485 Port Termination Resistance

Analog Input A2 Current/Voltage Signal Selection

Fig 2.19 Standard terminal board - Switch S1 function

The settings of switch S1 is shown in the following table.

Name

S1-1

Function

RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance

S1-2 Input method for analog input A2

Setting

OFF: No terminating resistance

ON: Terminating resistance of 110

V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k

Ω)

I: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250

Ω)

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 - Optional Terminal Board

An optional terminal board which supports switching the signal type of the analog outputs FM and AM between voltage and current is available.The switch over can be performed using jumper CN15. The switch

S1 has the same function like on the standard terminal board. See

Fig 2.20

for details.

Ch1

Ch2

CN15

I V

Off

Analog Output FM Current/Voltage Signal Selection

Analog Output AM Current/Voltage Signal Selection

RS422/485 Port Termination Resistance

Analog Input A2 Current/Voltage Signal Selection

V I

Fig 2.20 Optional terminal board - Switch S1 and jumper CN15 function

The settings of switch S1 and jumper CN15 are described in the following table.

Name

S1-1

S1-2

CN15-

CH1

CN15-

CH2

RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance

Function

Input method for analog input A2

Multifunction analog output FM voltage/ current switch

Setting

OFF: No terminating resistance

ON: Terminating resistance of 110

V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k

Ω)

I: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250

Ω)

I: Current output

V: Voltage output

Multifunction analog output AM voltage/ current switch

I: Current output

V: Voltage output

Sinking/Sourcing Mode

The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common, NPN) and sourcing mode

(+24V common, PNP) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.

Table 2.15 Sinking / Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Source - Sinking Mode (NPN) External Power Source - Sinking Mode (NPN)

External +24V

2-33

2-34

Table 2.15 Sinking / Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Source - Sourcing Mode (PNP) External Power Source - Sourcing Mode (PNP)

External +24V

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Fig 2.21

Multi-function digital inputs

[Factory settings]

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

External fault

Fault reset

Multi-step speed setting 1

Multi-step speed setting 2

Jog frequency selection

≈

Varispeed E7

CIMR-E7Z47P5

24V

E(G)

Shield terminal

E(G)

≈

Fault contact output

250 VAC, 1 A max.

30 VDC, 1 A max.

Contact output 1

[Default: During run]

Contact output 2

[Default: Zero speed]

Multi-function digital output

250 VAC, 1 A max.

30 VDC, 1 A max.

2kΩ

Adjustment

0 to 10V

4 to 20mA

MEMOBUS communication

RS-485/422

Analog input power supply

+15 V, 20 mA

Analog input 1: Master frequency reference

S+

S-

Multi-function analog input 1:

[Default: Frequency Bias

4 to 20 mA (250 )]

-V

Analog input power supply

-15 V, 20 mA

Terminating resistance

R+

R-

Adjustment,

20 k

Multi-function analog output 1

(0 to 10 V, 2 mA)

[Default: Output frequency, 0 to 10 V]

Adjustment,

20 k Ω

Multi-function analog output 2

(0 to 10 V, 2 mA)

[Default: Output current, 0 to 10 V]

Shielded wires P

Twisted-pair shielded wires

Fig 2.21 Control Circuit Terminal Connections

2-35

2-36

Control Circuit Wiring Precautions

Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.

•

Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,

, 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.

•

Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, and M4 (relay outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.

•

If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.

•

Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.

•

Ground the cable shields so as to maximize the contact area of the shield and ground.

•

Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.

Wiring Check

Checks

Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.

•

Is all wiring correct?

•

Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?

•

Are all screws tight?

•

Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?

CAUTION

• Ensure that the door locks are closed and the cable glands are tightened after wiring. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by the ingress of water or dust.

• Keep any water or dust outside of the Inverter when wiring. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by the ingress of water or dust.

• Use the proper cable gland for each cable. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by the ingress of water or dust.

• Mount the blind plugs attached for option and control card entry if these terminals are not connected.

This will keep IP54 protection for the inverter. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by the ingress of water or dust.

WARNING

• Be sure to ground the grounding terminal. Moreover be sure to ground the shield of motor cable on the motor side. Otherwise an electric shock can occur.

2-37

2-38

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Option Card Models

Option cards for field bus communications can be mounted in the Inverter like shown in

Fig 2.22

Table 2.16

lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.

Table 2.16 Option Cards

Card

Communication cards

PLC Option Card

Model

3G3RV-PDRT2

SI-P1

SI-R1

SI-S1

SI-J

3G3RV-P10ST8-E

3G3RV-P10ST8-DRT-E

Specifications

Intelligent DeviceNet option card

Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus

Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus

Option card for CANopen fieldbus

Option card for LONworks

PLC option card

PLC option card with DeviceNet communications port (Slave)

Installation in IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters

Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the

Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator, front cover and the option clip. Then mount the Option Card.

Preventing Option Card Connectors from Rising

After installing the Option Card insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The

Option Clip can be easily removed before installing the card by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.

CN2

C Option Card connector

C Option Card mounting spacer

C Option Card

Option Clip

(To prevent raising of

C Option Card)

Fig 2.22 Mounting Option Cards

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Installation in IP54 Inverters

Before mounting an Option Card, open the inverter door and be sure that the charge indicator inside the

Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the option clip and mount the Option Card like with the

IP00 or NEMA 1 Inverter.

Cable Gland Size for Option Cards

Refer to the terminal specification in each option card’s manual..

Table 2.17 Cable Gland Size for Option Cards

Cable Gland Size

Possible Clamping

Cable Diameter (mm)

Wire Type

M16

4.5 to 7

• Shielded twisted-pair wire

• Shielded, PVC multi-core cable

(e.g. Lappkabel Ölflex)

*1. Refer to

Table 2.5

for tightening torques for the cable glands.

Wiring Method for Option Cards

For the wiring refer to

page 2-29

and to

Fig 2.23

below.

Option Card

Cable Tie

(optional)

Option Cable

Cable Mounting Base

Earth Clamp

Fig 2.23 Option Card Wiring for Inverters with 22 to 55kW

2-39

2-40

Digital Operator and

Modes

This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.

Digital Operator..................................................................3-2

Modes ................................................................................3-5

3-2

Digital Operator

This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.

Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator for the IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 inverters are described below. This operator is referred to as “LED Digital Operator” or JVOP-161-OY

Drive Mode Indicators

FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is input.

REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is input.

SEQ: Lights up when the run command from the control circuit terminal is enabled.

REF: Lights up when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.

ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred.

Data Display

Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and settings.

Mode Display

DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.

QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.

ADV: Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.

VERIFY:Lights up in Verify Mode.

A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.

Keys

Execute operations such as setting user parameters, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.

Fig 3.1 LED Digital Operator Component Names and Functions

Digital Operator

The IP54 Inverter is equipped with a different type of digital operator, the LCD Digital Operator or JVOP-

160-OY. This Operator features a clear text display with 5 lines while the key names and functions are the same, see

Fig 3.2

. This operator is also available as an option for IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters.

Drive Mode Indicators

FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is input.

REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is input.

SEQ: Lights up when the run command from the control circuit terminal is enabled.

REF: Lights up when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.

ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred.

Data Display

Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and settings.

Keys

Execute operations such as setting user parameters, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.

Fig 3.2 LCD Digital Operator Component Names and Functions

Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in

Table 3.1

Table 3.1 Key Functions

Key Name

LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Function

Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and the settings in b1-01 and b1-02 (REMOTE).

This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.

MENU Key Selects the modes.

ESC Key

JOG Key

FWD/REV Key

Shift/RESET Key

Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.

Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the

Digital Operator.

Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator.

Sets the active digit when programming user parameters.

Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.

3-3

3-4

Key Name

Increment Key

Decrement Key

Table 3.1 Key Functions

Function

Selects user parameter numbers and increments parameter settings.

Used to move to the next item or data.

Selects user parameter numbers and decrements parameter settings.

Used to move to the previous item or data.

DATA/ENTER Key Enters menus and parameters and validates parameter settings.

RUN Key

Starts operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital

Operator (LOCAL Mode).

STOP Key

Stops Inverter operation (LOCAL and REMOTE Mode).

This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from a source different tan the operator by setting parameter o2-02.

Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the Key names listed in the above table.

There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate the operating status.

The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light while a DC current is injected in the motor. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in

Fig 3.3

Output

Frequency

RUN command

Frequency

Reference

RUN

STOP

Lit up

Blinking

Not lit up

Fig 3.3 RUN and STOP Indicators

Modes

This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.

Inverter Modes

The Inverter's user parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user parameters. The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.

The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the

Table 3.2

Drive mode

Mode

Quick programming mode

Advanced programming mode

Verify mode

Autotuning mode

Table 3.2 Modes

Primary function(s)

The Inverter can be run in this mode.

Use this mode for monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information and the fault history.

Use this mode to read and set the basic user parameters to operate the Inverter.

Use this mode to reference and set all user parameters.

Use this mode to read/set user parameters that have been changed from their factory-set values.

Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters. During

Autotuning the line-to-line resistance is measured and set automatically.

3-5

3-6

Switching Modes

The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from any other operator display. Press the MENU key to switch between the different modes.

When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed the monitor display is entered. Depending on the entered menu the monitor data or parameters are displayed.

Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Fig 3.4

shows the mode transition appearance with the LED digital operator.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

Power ON

Drive Mode

ESC

(Operation possible)

Quick Programming Mode

ESC

Advanced Programming Mode

ESC ESC

Verify Mode

ESC

Autotuning Mode

ESC

Lit Up Blinking Not lit up

Fig 3.4 Mode Transitions with LED Digital Operator

Example Operations with LCD Digital Operator

Fig 3.5

shows the mode transition appearance with the LCD digital operator.

Display at Startup

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 =60.00Hz

U1-02= 60.00Hz

U1-03= 10.05A

Mode Selection

Display

Monitor Display Setting Display

ESC

-DRIVE-

Monitor

-01

Rdy

= 0.00Hz

U1-02= 0.00Hz

U1-03= 0.00A

RESET

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 = 0.00Hz

U1-02= 0.00Hz

U1-03= 0.00A

ESC

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

ESC

-QUICK-

Select Language

A1-00= 0

English

*0*

ESC

-ADV-

Initialization

- 00= 0

Select Language

RESET

-ADV-

Select Language

A1 00 = 0

*0*

English

"0"

ESC ESC

-ADV-

Select Language

A1-00=

English

"0"

*0*

ESC

-VERIFY-

None Modified

ESC

-A.TUNE-

Mtr. Rated Power

T102 = 0.40kW

(0.00 ~ 650.00)

"0.40 kW"

ESC

-QUICK-

Select Language

A1-00=

English

"0"

*0*

-A.TUNE-

Mtr. Rated Power

(0.00 ~ 650.00)

"0.40kW"

Fig 3.5 Mode Transitions with LCD Digital Operator

Modes

3-7

3-8

Drive Mode

The Inverter can be operated in the Drive Mode. Monitor parameters, fault information and the fault history parameters can be displayed.

When b1-01 (Reference selection is set to 0, the frequency reference can be changed from the frequency setting display. Use the Increment, Decrement and Shift/RESET keys to change it. The set value will be accepted when the DATA/ENTER key has been pressed.

Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Fig 3.6

shows mode transition examples with the LED digital operator.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Parameter Display Frequency Setting Display

Drive Mode

Power ON

Frequency reference

Frequency Reference

Frequency reference setting/ display unit 01-03

Frequency Reference Setting /

Display unit set by 01-03

ESC

Output frequency

Output Frequency

ESC

Output current

Output Current

ESC

Monitor setting for o1-01

Monitor setting set by o1-01

ESC

Status Monitor

RESET

Frequency reference

Frequency Reference

ESC

Fan operating time

PI Feedback 2

ESC

Fault Trace

RESET

Current error

ESC

Operating time at error

ESC

RESET

1st previous error

Previous error

ESC

Operating time at 4th latest error

ESC

Fig 3.6 Operations in Drive Mode with LED Digital Operator

Modes

Example Operations with LCD Operator

Fig 3.7

shows mode transition examples with the LCD digital operator.

Display at Startup

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 =60.00Hz

U1-02= 60.00Hz

U1-03= 10.05A

Mode Selection

Display

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

ESC

Monitor Display

Frequency Setting Display

A B

-DRIVERdy

Monitor

U1 - 01=60.00Hz

U1-02= 60.00Hz

U1-03= 10.05A

1 2

RESET

ESC

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 =60.00Hz

U1-02= 60.00Hz

U1-03= 10.05A

-DRIVERdy

Monitor

- 02

=60.00Hz

U1-03= 10.05A

U1-06= 203.5VAC

RESET

-DRIVE-

Output Freq

Rdy

U1 -

02 =60.00Hz

U1-03= 10.05A

U1-06= 203.5VAC

ESC

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

(0.00 60.00)

"0.00Hz"

ESC

The Frequency Setting

Display will not be displayed when an frequency reference source different than the digital operator is used.

-DRIVERdy

Monitor

U1 - 53 =13.17%

U1-01= 60.00Hz

U1-02= 60.00Hz

-DRIVE-

Fault Trace

U2 - 01= None

U2-02= OC

U2-03= 60.00Hz

Rdy

RESET

-DRIVE-

PI Feedback 2

Rdy

U1 - 53 =13.17%

U1-01= 60.00Hz

U1-02= 60.00Hz

ESC

RESET

-DRIVE-

Current Fault

U2 01 = None

U2-02= OC

U2-03= 60.00Hz

Rdy

ESC

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-DRIVE-

Fault Trace

U2 - 02= OC

U2-03= 60.00Hz

U2-04= 60.00Hz

Rdy

-DRIVE-

Fault History

U3 - 01 = OC

U3-02= OV

U3-03= OH

Rdy

RESET

-DRIVE-

Last Fault

U2 02 = OC

U2-03= 60.00Hz

U2-04= 60.00Hz

Rdy

ESC

Rdy

RESET

U3 01 = OC

U3-02= OV

U3-03= OH

ESC

U2 - 02= OC

Over Current

Rdy

U3 - 01= OC

Over Current

Rdy

-DRIVE-

Fault History

U3 - 02 = OV

U3-03= OH

U3-04= UV

Rdy

RESET

ESC

-DRIVE-

Fault History

U3 -

02 = OV

U3-03= OH

U3-04= UV

Rdy

5 6

A B

ESC

U3 - 02= OV

DC Bus Overvolt

Rdy

Fig 3.7 Operations in Drive Mode with LCD Digital Operator

IMPORTANT

To run the Inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key in sequence to enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the Inverter in any other display.

To enable Run commands from other sources during programming set parameter b1-08 to “1”.

Quick Programming Mode

In Quick Programming Mode, the basic parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.

The parameters can be changed in the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement and Shift/RESET keys to change the settings. The setting will be saved and the display will return to the monitor display when the

DATA/Enter key is pressed.

Chapter 5, User Parameters

for details on the parameters displayed in Quick Programming Mode.

3-9

Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Fig 3.8

shows example operations in Quick Programming Mode with the LED Digital Operator.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display

Quick Programming Mode Reference Source

ESC

RUN Command Source

ESC

3-10

ESC

Motor Rated Current

ESC

Fig 3.8 Operations in Quick Programming Mode with LED Digital Operators

Example Operations with LCD Operator

Fig 3.9

shows example operations in Quick Programming Mode using the LCD Digital Operator.

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

ESC

A

B

-QUICK-

Reference Source b1-01= 1

*1*

Terminals

"1"

-QUICK-

Run Source b1-02= 1

*1*

Terminals

"1"

ESC

-QUICK-

Reference Source b1-01=

Terminals

"1"

*1*

-QUICK-

Run Source b1-02=

Terminals

"1"

*1*

-QUICK-

Motor Rated FLA

E2-01= 1.90A

(0.32 ~ 6.40)

"1.90A"

A

B

ESC

-QUICK-

Motor Rated FLA

E2-01= 0 01.90A

(0.32 ~ 6.40)

"1.90A"

Fig 3.9 Operations in Quick Programming Mode with LCD Digital Operators

Modes

Advanced Programming Mode

In Advanced Programming Mode all parameters can be monitored and set.

The parameters can be changed from the setting display. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the settings. The setting will be saved and the display will return to the monitor display when the DATA/Enter key is pressed.

Chapter 5, User Parameters

for details on the parameters.

Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Fig 3.10

shows example operations in Advanced Programming Mode with the LED Digital Operator.

Mode Selection Display

Function Selection Display

Monitor Display

Setting Display

ESC

Initialize Mode: A1-xx

RESET

ESC

Language Selection

Access Level

ESC

Initialize

ESC

PI Control: b5-xx

RESET

PI Control Mode Selection

ESC

Proportional Gain

ESC

PI Unit Selection

ESC

Copy Function: o3-xx

RESET

Copy Function Selection

ESC

Read Permission Selection

ESC

Fig 3.10 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode with LED Digital Operator

3-11

3-12

Example Operations with LCD Digital Operator

Fig 3.11

shows example operations in Advanced Programming Mode using the LCD Digital Operator.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

1 2

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

A B

ESC

-ADV-

Initialization

- 00= 0

Select Language

RESET

-ADV-

Select Language

- 00 = 0

English

"0"

*0*

ESC

-ADV-

Select Language

- 01 = 0

English

"0"

*0*

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-ADV-

Initialization

- 03= 0

Init Parameters

ESC

-ADV-

Init Parameters

- 03 = 0

No Initialize

"0"

*0*

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-ADV-

PI Control b5

- 01= 0

PI Mode

-ADV-

PI Control b5 - 29= 1.00

PI Fb SqRt Gain

A B

RESET

-ADV-

Init Parameters

- 03 = 0

No Initialize

"0"

*0*

ESC

1 2

3

4

RESET

-ADV-

PI Mode b5

- 01 = 0

Disabled

"0"

*0*

ESC

RESET

-ADV-

PI Fb SqRt Gain b5

- 29 = 1.00

(0.00 2.00)

"1.00"

ESC

3 4

ESC

-ADV-

PI Mode b5

- 01 = 0

Disabled

"0"

*0*

ESC

-ADV-

PI Fb SqRt Gain b5 29 = 1 .00

(0.00 2.00)

"1.00"

Fig 3.11 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode with LCD Digital Operator

Modes

Setting User Parameters using the LED Digital Operator

Below in

Table 3.3

the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 sec. to 20 sec. is shown using the LED Digital Operator

Table 3.3 Setting User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode using the LED Digital Operator

Step

No.

Digital Operator Display Description

1 Power supply turned ON.

Press the MENU key to enter the Mode Selection Display.

Press the MENU key to scroll through the

Mode Selection Display.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the

Monitor Display in Advanced Programming

Mode.

Press the Increment or Decrement key until

C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) is displayed.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the setting display. The setting can be changed now.

Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.

Press the Decrement key to change the value to

20.00sec.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to validate the new setting. “End” is displayed for 1 sec., then the new parameter setting for 0.5 sec.

The display returns to the Monitor Display.

3-13

3-14

Setting User Parameters using the LCD Digital Operator

Below in

Table 3.4

the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 sec. to 20 sec. is shown

using the LCD Digital Operator.

Table 3.4 Setting User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode using the LCD Digital Operator

Step

No.

Digital Operator Display Description

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 =50.00Hz

U1-02= 0.00Hz

U1-03= 0.00A

Display after power supply has been turned ON.

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

Press the MENU key to enter the mode selection display.

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

Press the MENU key to scroll to the position of the advanced programming Menu.

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-ADV-

Initialization

Select Language

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

10.0sec

Accel Time 1

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

0 010.0sec

(0.0~6000.0)

10.0sec

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

0 0 10.0sec

(0.0~6000.0)

10.0sec

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

00 1 0.0sec

(0.0~6000.0)

10.0sec

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

00 2 0.0sec

(0.0~6000.0)

10.0sec

-ADV-

Entry Accepted

Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the monitor display.

Press the Increment or Decrement key until C1-

01 (Acceleration Time 1) is displayed.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to access setting display. The setting can be changed now.

Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.

Press the Decrement key to change the value to

20.00 s.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to validate the new setting.

-ADV-

Accel/Decel

C1 01 = 20.0sec

(0.0~6000.0)

10.0sec

“Entry Accepted” is displayed for appr. 1.0 sec. after the data setting has been confirmed with the DATA/ENTER key. The display returns to the C1-01 monitor display.

Modes

Verify Mode

Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings, either by programming or autotuning. If no parameter setting has been changed the display will show “NONE” with the

LED operator or “None Modified” with the LCD operator.

In Verify Mode the same procedures as in the programming modes can be used to change parameter settings.

Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Fig 3.12

shows an example of operations in the Verify Mode. In that example following parameters have been changed from their default settings: Reference Selection (b1-01), Acceleration Time 1 (c1-01), Input Voltage

Setting (E1-01) and Motor Rated Current (E2-01).

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

Verify Mode

ESC

Frequency Reference Selection

ESC

Frequency Reference Selection

Acceleration Time 1

ESC ESC

Input Voltage Setting

ESC ESC

Motor Rated Current

ESC ESC

Fig 3.12 Operations in Verify Mode with LED Digital Operator

3-15

3-16

Example Operations with LCD Digital Operator

Fig 3.13

shows an example of operations in the Verify Mode using the LCD Digital Operator. The same parameters have been modified like in

Fig 3.12

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display

Setting Display

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

ESC

A B

-VERIFY-

Reference Source b1 - 01 = 0

*0*

Operator

"1"

-VERIFY-

Accel Time 1

C1 01 = 20.0sec

(0.0 6000.0sec)

"10.0sec"

-VERIFY-

Input Voltage

E1 - 01 = 380VAC

(310 510)

"400VAC"

-VERIFY-

Motor Rated FLA

01 = 2.00A

(0.32 6.40)

"1.90A"

A B

ESC

-VERIFY-

Reference Source b1

- 01 = 0

Terminals

"1"

*0*

-VERIFY-

Accel Time 1

C1 0 020.0sec

(0.0 6000.0sec)

"10.0sec"

E1 01 = 3 8 0VAC

(310 510)

"400VAC"

-VERIFY-

Motor Rated FLA

E2 01 = 0 02.00A

(0.32 6.40)

"1.90A"

Fig 3.13 Operations in Verify Mode with LCD Digital Operator

Modes

Autotuning Mode

Autotuning automatically measures and sets the motor line-to-line resistance parameter including the motor cable in order to compensate the voltage drop and to achieve the best performance.

Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Set the motor rated output power (in kW) and the motor rated current, specified on the motor nameplate and then press the RUN key. The motor is automatically run and the line-to-line resistance is measured.

Fig 3.14

shows an example for an Autotuning procedure.

Mode Selection Display Autotuning Monitor Display

Setting Display

Autotuning Motor Output Power Motor Output Power

ESC

Motor Rated Current Motor Rated Current

ESC

Autotuning Start

RUN

Autotuning

STOP

Stop Command Input

Autotuning Completed

Fig 3.14 Operation in Autotuning Mode with LED Digital Operator

3-17

3-18

Example Operations with LCD Digital Operator

Fig 3.15

shows an example for an Autotuning procedure with LCD Digital Operator

Mode Selection Display

Autotuning

Monitor Display

Setting Display

-A.TUNE-

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

ESC

-A. TUNE-

Mtr Rated Power

- 02 = 0.40

(0.00~650.00)

"0.40kW"

ESC

-A. TUNE-

Mtr Rated Power

T1 - 02 = 0 00.40

(0.00~650.00)

"0.40kW"

-DRIVE-

** Main Menu **

Operation

-QUICK-

** Main Menu **

Quick Setting

-A. TUNE-

Rated Current

- 04 = 1.90

(0.32~6.40)

"1.90A"

ESC

-A. TUNE-

Rated Current

- 04 = 0 01.90

(0.32~6.40)

"1.90A"

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

-A. TUNE-

Auto-Tuning

0Hz/ 0.00A

Tuning Ready ?

Press RUN key

Rdy

RUN

ESC

-A. TUNE-

Auto-Tuning

0Hz/ 0.38A

Rdy

START > > > GOAL

STOP

-A. TUNE-

Tune Aborted

STOP key

-A. TUNE-

Tune Successful

0Hz/ 0.00A

-VERIFY-

** Main Menu **

Modified Consts

Fig 3.15 Operation in Autotuning Mode with LCD Digital Operator

IMPORTANT

If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to

Trial Operation Procedure..................................................4-2

Trial Operation

This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation.

Trial Operation ...................................................................4-3

Adjustment Suggestions ..................................................4-11

4-2

Trial Operation Procedure

Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.

START

Installation

Wiring

Set power supply voltage jumper.

Turn ON power.

*1: Set the jumper for 400V class Inverters

of 75kW and more

Confirm status.

Basic settings

(Quick programming mode)

Set E1-03.

V/f default: 400V/50Hz

Motor cable over

50 m or heavy load possibly causing motor to stall or overload?

YES

Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance

Application settings

(Advanced programming mode)

No-load operation

Loaded operation

Optimum adjustments and parameter settings

Check/record parameters.

END

Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart

Trial Operation

The procedure for the trial operation is described in order in this section.

Application Confirmation

First, confirm the application before using the Inverter. It is designed for:

•

Fan, blower, pump

Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper

(400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)

The power supply voltage jumper must be set for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.

The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.

1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.

2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.

3. Remove the terminal cover.

4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see

Fig 4.2

5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.

Connector

Jumper (factory-set position)

200 V class power supply

400V class power supply

Power supply input terminals

CHARGE indicator

Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Setting

Power ON

Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.

•

Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.

•

200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz

•

400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz

•

Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.

•

Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.

•

Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.

•

Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status) if possible.

4-3

4-4

Checking the Display Status

After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following depending on the operator.

Display with LED Digital Operator

After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following:

Display for normal operation

The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.

When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to

. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.

Display for fault operation

The display will differ depending on the type of fault.

A low voltage alarm is shown at left.

Display with LCD Digital Operator

After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following:

Display for normal operation

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

U1 01 =50.00Hz

U1-02= 0.00Hz

U1-03= 0.00A

The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.

When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to

for details about 2-wire and 3-wire initialization.

. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.

Display for fault operation

-DRIVE-

Main Power Loss

The display will differ depending on the type of fault.

A low voltage alarm is shown at left.

Trial Operation

Basic Settings

Before starting the Inverter ensure that it is initialized, i.e. all parameters are set to their factory defaults.

Therefor set parameter A1-03 to 2220 for 2-wire initialization or to 3330 for 3-wire initialization. Refer to

page 6-9, Run Command

Refer to

Chapter 3, Digital Operator and Modes

for Digital Operator operating procedures. Find a list of the

Quick Programming Parameters on

page 5-4, User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode

and details of the parameters in

Chapter 6, Parameter Settings by Function

Table 4.1 Basic Parameter Settings

: Must be set. : Set as required.

Class

Parameter

Number b1-01 b1-02 b1-03

C1-01

C1-02

Name Description

Setting

Range

Reference selection

Deceleration time 1

Sets the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal

(analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

Operation method selection

Sets the run command input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (digital input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

Stopping method selection

Acceleration time 1

Selects stopping method when stop command is sent.

0: Deceleration to stop

1: Coast to stop

2: DC braking stop

3: Coast to stop with timer

Sets the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 0% to

100%.

Sets the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to

0%.

0 to 3

0.0 to 6000.0

d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17

Frequency references 1 to 4 and jog frequency reference

Sets the required speed references for multi-step speed operation or jogging.

Factory

Setting

10.0 s

0 to 200.00 Hz d1-01 to d1-04: 0.00

Hz d1-17: 6.00

Page

6-5

6-52

6-9

6-52

6-11

4-11

6-15

4-11

6-15

6-7

E1-01

Input voltage setting

Sets the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.

155 to

255 V

200 V

6-19

E2-01

L1-01

Motor rated current

Sets the motor rated current.

Motor protection selection

Used to enable or disable the motor overload protection function.

0: Disabled

1: Protection for general purpose motor

(fan cooled)

2: Protection for inverter motor (externally cooled motor)

3: Vector motor protection

0.32 to 6.40

0 to 3

1.90 A

6-33

6-99

6-33

4-5

4-6

Table 4.1 Basic Parameter Settings

: Must be set. : Set as required.

Class

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Page

L3-02

Stall prevention selection during acceleration

Sets the stall prevention level (current limit) during acceleration as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.

0 to 200% 120%

6-17

L3-04

Stall prevention selection during deceleration

If using the dynamic brake option (Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units), be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 (disabled).

0 to 2

*1. Values for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class Inverter the values have to be doubled.

*2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

*3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given

6-19

Trial Operation

Selecting the V/f pattern

•

Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.

Table 4.1 Selecting the V/f Pattern

Motor V/f Selection

E1-03 = 0

General purpose motor at 50 Hz

E1-03 = F (default)(Parameters E1-04 to E-13 are changeable and preset for 50 Hz)

General pupoase motor at 60 Hz E1-03 = 1

•

It is recommended to perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling.

Autotuning

Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance

Autotuning can be used to improve the performance when very long motor cables are used or when motor and inverter have different power ratings.

To perform autotuning set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor rated current) and then press the

RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds and the line-to-line resistance (stator windings and cable resistance) will be measured automatically.

IMPORTANT

Power will be supplied to the motor during autotuning but the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.

Parameter Settings for Autotuning

The following parameters must be set for autotuning.

Parameter

Number

Name Display

T1-02

Motor output power

Set the output power of the motor in Kilowatts.

T1-04

Motor rated current

Set the rated current of the motor in Amps.

Setting Range

Factory Setting

10% to 200% of

Inverter rated output

10% to 200% of

Inverter rated current

Same as

Inverter rated output

Same as general-purpose motor with same capacity as Inverter

4-7

4-8

Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning using LED Digital Operator

The following displays will appear on the LED Digital Operator during autotuning.

Table 4.2 LED Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display

Motor rated power and current: T1-02 and T1-04

Description

When the Autotuning Mode is entered parameters T1-

02 and T1-04 have to entered.

Autotuning start display: TUn12

Autotuning in progress Stop command input

The autotuning start display will appear when the parameter settings have been completed. The

A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.

Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning an error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.

page 7-13, Autotuning Faults

for details.

Autotuning completed

END will be displayed after approximately 20 seconds, indicating that autotuning has been completed.

Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning using LCD Digital Operator

The following displays will appear on the LCD Digital Operator during autotuning.

Table 4.3 LCD Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display

Motor rated power and current: T1-02 and T1-04

-A. TUNE-

Mtr Rated Power

- 02 = 0.40

(0.00~650.00)

"0.40kW"

Description

When the Autotuning Mode is entered parameters T1-

02 and T1-04 have to entered.

Autotuning start display

-A. TUNE-

Auto-Tuning

0Hz/ 0.00A

Tuning Ready ?

Press RUN key

Rdy

Autotuning

-A. TUNE-

Auto-Tuning

0Hz/ 0.38A

Rdy

START > > > GOAL

Autotuning completed

-A. TUNE-

Tune Successful

0Hz/ 0.00A

The autotuning start display will appear when the parameter settings have been completed. Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display.

Stop command input

-A. TUNE-

Tune Aborted

STOP key

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning an error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped.

page 7-13, Autotuning Faults

for details.

“Tune Successful” will be displayed after approximately 20 seconds, indicating that autotuning has been completed.

Trial Operation

Application Settings

User parameters can be set as required in advanced programming mode. All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode.

Setting Examples

The following are examples of settings for applications.

•

To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation or to 3 for output phase rotation and reverse disabled.

•

To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.

•

To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0% to 90% speed), set H3-02 to 90.0%.

•

To limit the speed range between 20% and 80% set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.

No-load Operation

This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not connected to the motor. To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it’s recommended to use the LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the

SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).

Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital

Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applications, at which the machine can be driven in one direction only, check the motor rotation direction.

Operation with Jog frequency reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the JOG key on the Digital Operator. If the external control circuit prevents operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminal).

NOTE

Both, a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must be provided to start Inverter operation.

Loaded Operation

Connecting the Load

•

After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.

•

Be sure to tighten all the screws when connecting the motor shaft to the mechanical system.

Operation using the Digital Operator

•

Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.

•

For the case that a fault occurs during operation, make sure that the STOP key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.

•

At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed, e.g. to one tenth of the nominal operating speed.

4-9

4-10

Checking Operating Status

•

Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.

•

After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too high.

•

page 4-11, Adjustment Suggestions

if hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the control system occur.

Check and Recording User Parameters

Use verify mode to check user parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user parameter table.

Any user parameters that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.

If required, the copy function (parameters o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode) can be used to copy the changed settings from the inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if the inverter has to be replaced for any reason.

The following functions can also be used to manage user parameters.

•

Recording user parameters

•

Setting access levels for user parameters

•

Setting a password

Recording User Parameters (o2-03)

If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user parameters will be saved in a separate memory area in the inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the user parameters can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.

User Parameter Access Levels (A1-01)

A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user parameters from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1 (User-specified Parameters) to display only parameters required by the machine or application in a programming mode. These parameters can be determined by setting the A2 parameters.

Password (A1-04 and A1-05)

When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user parameters will be displayed only when the correct password has been input.

Adjustment Suggestions

If hunting, vibration or other problems occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists the most commonly used user parameters only.

Table 4.4 Useful Parameters in case of Problems during Trial Operation

Name (Parameter

Number)

Performance

Hunting-prevention gain (N1-02)

Controlling hunting and vibration in middlerange speeds

(20 to 80% FMAX)

Carrier frequency selec-

• Reducing motor magnetic noise tion

(C6-02)

• Controlling hunting and vibration at low

Torque compensation delay time constant

(C4-02)

Torque compensation gain (C4-01) speeds

• Increasing torque and speed response

• Controlling hunting and vibration

• Improving torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower)

• Controlling hunting and vibration

Middle output frequency voltage

(E1-08)

Minimum output frequency voltage

(E1-10)

• Improving torque at low speeds

• Controlling shock at startup

Factory Setting

1.00

Depends on capacity

1.00

Depends on capacity and voltage

Recommended

Setting

0.50 to 2.00

0.4 kHz to default

200 to 1000 ms

0.50 to 1.50

Default to

“Default + 3 to 5

V”

*1. The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.

Adjustment Method

• Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads.

• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.

• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.

• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.

• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

• Increase the setting in small steps of 0.05 if torque is insufficient at low speeds.

• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.

• Increase the setting in small steps of 1 or 2 V if torque is insufficient at low speeds

• Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large.

The following user parameters will also affect the control system indirectly.

Table 4.5 Parameters influencing performance indirectly

Name (Parameter Number)

Acceleration/deceleration times

(C1-01 to C1-09)

S-curve characteristics (C2-01 and C2-02)

Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)

Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)

Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)

Application

Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.

Used to prevent speed shock at start or stop of the acceleration.

Used to avoid resonance points during constant speed.

Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.

Used to prevent OV (overvoltage error) and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using an optional braking resistor unit and braking unit, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0.

4-11

4-12

User Parameters

This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.

User Parameter Descriptions .............................................5-2

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ................5-3

User Parameter Tables......................................................5-6

5-2

User Parameter Descriptions

This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.

Description of User Parameter Tables

User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS Register

Page b1-01

Reference selection

Sets the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

0 to 3 1 No Q 180H –

• Parameter Number:

• Name:

• Description:

• Setting Range:

• Factory Setting:

• Change during Operation:

• Access Level:

• MEMOBUS Register:

• Page:

The number of the user parameter.

The name of the user parameter.

Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.

The setting range for the user parameter.

The default setting of the user parameter.

Indicates whether the parameter can be changed while the Inverter is in operation or not.

Yes: Changes are possible during operation.

No: Changes are not possible during operation.

Indicates the parameter access level in which the parameter can be changed or monitored.

Q: Quick programming mode and advanced programming mode.

A: Advanced programming mode only.

The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.

Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.

MENU Drive Mode

Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.

Quick Programming Mode

Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set.

Advanced Programming Mode

All parameters can be monitored or set.

Verify Mode

Parameters changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.

Autotuning Mode

Automatically measures the line-to-line resistance.

Function

Status Monitor Parameters

Fault Trace

Fault History

Initialize Mode

User-specified Setting Mode

Operation Mode Selections

DC Injection Braking

Speed Search

Timer Function

PI Control

Energy Saving

Acceleration/Deceleration

S-curve Acceleration

Torque Compensation

Carrier Frequency

Preset Reference

Reference Limits

Jump Frequencies

Reference Frequency Hold

V/f Pattern

Motor Setup

Communications Option Card

Multi-function Digital Inputs

Multi-function Digital Outputs

Multi-function Analog Inputs

Multi-function Analog Outputs

MEMOBUS Communications

Motor Overload

Power Loss Ride through

Stall Prevention

Reference Detection

Fault Restart

Load Detection

Hardware Protection

Hunting Prevention Function

High Slip Braking

Monitor Select

Multi-function Selections

Copy Function

Motor Autotuning

No.

L8 n1

L4 n3 o1 o2 o3

H1 d1 d2 d3 d4

C6 b3 b4 b5 b8

A2 b1 b2

Page

5-41

5-44

5-45

5-29

5-30

5-31

5-32

5-33

5-34

5-35

5-20

5-21

5-22

5-23

5-24

5-25

5-27

5-28

5-35

5-36

5-38

5-39

5-15

5-16

5-17

5-18

5-19

5-10

5-11

5-14

5-6

5-7

5-8

5-9

5-40

5-3

5-4

User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode

Commonly needed parameters for start-up of the Inverter can be monitored and set in the Quick Programming

Mode. Those parameters are listed in the following tables. All user parameters, including the Quick Programming Parameters can be found in the Advanced Programming Mode as well.

Quick Programming Parameters that are Always Available

Following table shows the parameter that are always available in Quick Programming Mode.

Parameter Number b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b5-01

C1-01

C1-02 d2-01 d2-02

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Reference source selection

Sets the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

RUN command source selection

Sets the run command input method

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction inputs)

2: MEMOBUS communications

3: Option Card

Stopping method selection

Acceleration time 1

Select stopping method when stop command is input.

0: Deceleration to stop

1: Coast to stop

2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to stop, without regenerative operation.)

3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are disregarded during deceleration time.)

PI control mode selection

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

3: PI control enabled (frequency reference + PI output)

When PI controller is enabled additional parameters are available in Quick Programming Mode and default values are changed, refer to the following table.

Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.

0 to 3

0, 1, 3

0.0 to

6000.0

Deceleration time 1

Frequency reference upper limit

Frequency reference lower limit

Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to

0 Hz.

Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.

Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

10.0 sec.

100.0% No

0.0%

Yes

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

180H

181H

182H

1A5H

200H

201H

289H

28AH

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels

Parameter Number

E1-01

E2-01

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Input voltage setting

Sets the inverter input voltage. This set value will be the basis for the protection functions.

155 to

255

200 V

Motor rated current

Sets the motor rated current in Amps.

This set value becomes the base value for motor protection and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.

0.32 to

6.40

1.90 A

300H

30EH

*1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. For 400 V class Inverters the value has to be doubled.

*2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current.

*3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity (the value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given).

Quick Programming Parameters that are Available with Enabled PI Controller

Following list shows the parameters that are available additionally in Quick Programming Mode whenever the

PI controller is enabled. The default settings are also set automatically to settings commonly used with the PI controller.

Parameter Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

H3-08

H3-09

H3-13

Analog input

A2 signal level selection

Analog input

A2 function selection

Terminal A1/

A2 switching

Selects the signal level input at multifunction analog input A2.

0: 0 to +10V (11 bit input)

2: 4 to 20mA (9 bit input)

3: 0 to 20mA (9 bit input)

Selects the multi-function analog input function for terminal A2. Refer to the

table

H3-09 Settings

for the explanation

of the settings range.

Selects on which terminal the main frequency reference can be input.

0: Use analog input 1 on terminal A1 for main frequency reference.

1: Use analog input 2 on terminal A2 for main frequency reference.

0, 2, 3

0 to 1F

0, 1

0 b5-31 PI unit selection

Selects the units for the PI controller values (b5-19, U1-24, U1-38).

Refer to table

b5-31 Settings

for the

explanation of the setting range b5-02

Proportional (P) gain

Sets the proportional gain of the PI controller. P control is not performed when set to 0.00

b5-03 Integral (I) time

Sets the integral time of the PI controller.

I control is not performed when set to 0.0.

0 to 11

0.00 to

25.00

0.0 to

360.0

1.00

Yes

1.0 sec.

Yes

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

417H

418H

41CH

1EDH

1A6H

1A7H

*1. Parameter is only moved into Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise the parameter is only available in Advanced

Programming Mode.

*2. Setting switched to “B” (PI feedback) only when PI controller is enabled, otherwise default setting is “2” (Auxiliary Reference)

5-5

5-6

User Parameter Tables

Setup Settings: A

Initialize Mode: A1

Parameter

Number

Name Description

A1-00

Language selection for Digital

Operator display

Used to select the language displayed on the LCD or HOA Digital

Operator only.

0: English

2: German

3: French

4: Italian

5: Spanish

6: Portuguese

This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.

A1-01

Parameter access level

Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)

0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-01 and A1-04.)

1: Used to select user parameter

(Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)

2: Advanced

(Parameters can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming (A) mode.)

A1-03 Initialize

A1-04 Password

A1-05 Password setting

Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method.

0: No initializing

1110:Initializes using the user parameters that have been stored before using o2-03 parameter

2220:Initializes using a two-wire sequence. (Initializes to the factory setting.)

3330:Initializes using a three-wire sequence.

Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.

This function write-protects parameters of the initialize mode.

If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 parameters can only be changed after inputting the right password.

Used to set a four digit number as the password.

Usually this parameter is not displayed. When the password (A1-

04) is displayed, hold down the

RESET key and press the Menu key and A1-05 will be displayed.

Setting

Range

0 to 6

0 to 2

0 to

3330

0 to

9999

0 to

9999

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Yes

MEMO-

BUS

100H

103H

Page

–

101H

–

104H

105H

page 6-94, PI Sleep Function

User Parameter Tables

User-set Parameters: A2

Parameter

Number

Name

A2-01 to

A2-32

User-set parameters

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Used to select the function for each of the user specified parameters.

User parameters are the only accessible parameters if Parameter

Access Level is set to user parameters (A1-01=1) b1-01 to o3-02

– No A

106H to

125H

Page

6-118

5-7

5-8

Application Parameters: b

Operation Mode Selections: b1

Parameter

Number

Name Description b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-07 b1-08

Reference source selection

Sets the frequency reference input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (analog inputs)

2: Serial communications (RS

422/485)

3: Option Card (connected on

CN2)

RUN command source selection

Sets the run command input method.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction inputs)

2: Serial communications (RS

422/485)

3: Option Card (connceted on

CN2)

Stopping method selection

Selects the stopping method when the Run signal is removed

0: Deceleration to stop

1: Coast to stop

2: DC injection to stop

3: Coast to stop with timer (New

Run commands are disregarded while coasting.)

Prohibition of reverse operation

Operation selection after switching to remote mode

Run command selection in programming modes

0: Reverse enabled

1: Reverse disabled

2: Output Phase Rotation (both rotational directions are enabled)

3: Output Phase Rotation with

Reverse disabled.

Selects if the Inverter accepts a

Run command that is already set when the Inverter is switched to

Remote Mode.

0: Preset Run signals are disregarded.

(Run signal has to be cycled once to become active)

1: Preset Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode.

Selects if a Run signal will be accepted when the Inverter is in any Programming Mode.

0: Run signal is disregarded.

1: Run signal is accepted (Disabled for b1-02 = 0).

Setting

Range

0 to 3

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

180H

181H

Page

6-5

6-52

6-9

6-52

182H

6-11

183H

6-37

186H

187H

–

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range b1-11 b1-12 b1-13

RUN delay

Sets the delay time for the execution of the Run signal. During the delay the Digital Operator display will show “ddLY”

HAND frequency reference source selection

Sets the source of frequency reference for HAND operation.

0: Digital Operator

1: Control Circuit Terminal (analog input)

HAND/AUTO switching during

Run selection

Selects if the Inverter will permit switching between HAND and

AUTO Modes while running.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled b1-14 b1-15

Emergency override speed

Emergency override reference selection

0 to

600

0 or 1

Sets the frequency reference used in emergency override mode when b1-15=0.

Selects the emergency override reference source.

0: Use b1-14 as frequency reference

1: Use AUTO as frequency reference

0.00 to

200.0

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0 sec.

0.00

*1. This parameter is effective only, when the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used.

MEMO-

BUS

1DFH

1E0H

61DH

61AH

61BH

Page

–

6-61

6-108

DC Injection Braking: b2

Parameter

Number b2-01 b2-02 b2-03 b2-04

Name

DC injection braking start frequency

DC injection braking current

DC injection braking time at start

DC injection braking time at stop

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Used to set the frequency at which

DC injection braking starts in units of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0 (deceleration to stop).

If b2-01 < E1-09 (Min. output freq.) then DC injection begins at

E1-09.

Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.

Sets the time DC injection braking is performed before the Inverter starts to accelerate the motor.

Used to stop a coasting motor before restarting it.

A set value of 0 sec. disables DC injection braking at start.

Sets the time DC injection braking is performed after finished deceleration.

Used to prevent coasting at the end of deceleration.

A set value of 0 sec. disables DC injection braking at stop

0.0 to

10.0

0 to

100

0.00

10.00

0.00

10.00

0.5 Hz

50%

0.00 sec.

0.50 sec.

MEMO-

BUS

18AH

18BH

6-13

18CH

Page

189H

6-13

6-11

6-13

6-11

6-13

5-9

5-10

Parameter

Number b2-09

Motor preheat current 1 b2-10

Name

Motor preheat current 2

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Sets the motor preheat current level in % of the Inverter rated current.

Motor preheat is enabled by an digital input.

Sets the motor preheat current level

2 in % of the Inverter rated current.

Motor preheat 2 is enabled by an digital input.

0 to

100

0 to 10 5%

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

1E1H

61CH

Page

6-106

Speed Search: b3

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

Enables/disables the speed search function and sets the speed search method.

0:Disabled, speed calculation

1: Enabled, speed calculation

2: Disabled, current detection

3: Enabled, current detection b3-01

Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation)

Speed Calculation:

When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency (motor direction is also searched).

0 to 3 2 No A 191H

6-39

b3-02 b3-03

Current Detection:

The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency, and the speed is detected at the search current level.

Speed search operating current

(current detection)

Speed search deceleration time

(current detection)

Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the

Inverter rated current as 100%.

Usually not necessary to set. When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, reduce the value.

Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in 1second units.

Sets the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.

b3-05

Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation)

When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed for the time set here.

If e.g. a contactor is used at the output side of the inverter set this parameter to the contactor delay time or more.

0 to

200

0.1 to

10.0

2.0 sec.

0.0 to

20.0

120%

0.2 sec.

192H

6-39

193H

6-39

195H

6-39

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name b3-14

Bi-directional speed search selection

Description

Disables or enables the bi-directional capabilities of the speed search function.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 or 1 1 No A 19EH

6-39

Timer Function: b4

Parameter

Number

Name b4-01

Timer function

ON-delay time b4-02

Timer function

OFF-delay time

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Sets the timer function output ONdelay time (dead time) for the timer function input.

Enabled when the timer function is set in H1 and H2.

0.0 to

3000.0

Sets the timer function output

OFF-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input.

Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 and H2-

0.0 to

3000.0

0.0 sec.

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

1A3H

1A4H

Page

6-86

PI Control: b5

Parameter

Number b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08

PI control mode selection

Proportional (P) gain

PI delay time constant b5-09

PI output characteristics selection b5-10

Name

Integral (I) time

Integral (I) limit

PI limit

PI offset

PI output gain

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

3: PI control enabled (frequency reference + PI output)

Sets the proportional gain of the PI controller. P control is not performed when set 0.00.

Sets the integral time of the PI controller. I control is not performed when set to 0.0 sec.

0.00

25.00

0.0 to

360.0

Sets the I control limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.

Sets the limit after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.

Sets the offset after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.

Sets the time constant for low pass filter of the PI control output.

Usually not necessary to set.

Selects forward/reverse direction for PI output.

0: PI output is forward.

1: PI output is reversed.

0.0 to

100.0

0.0 to

100.0

-100.0

+100.0

0.00 to

10.00

0 or 1

100.0% Yes

0.0%

0.00 sec.

Yes

Sets output gain.

0, 1, 3

0.0 to

25.0

1.00

1.0 sec.

1.0

Yes

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1A5H

6-87

1A6H

6-87

1A7H

6-87

1A8H

6-87

1AAH

6-87

1ABH

6-87

1ACH

6-87

1ADH

6-87

1AEH

6-87

5-11

5-12

Parameter

Number

Name Description b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18

PI reverse output selection

Selection of PI feedback signal loss detection

PI feedback loss detection level

0: Limit to 0 when PI output is negative.

1: Reverses when PI output is negative.

Limit to 0 is also active when reverse operation disabled is selected by b1-04.

0: No detection of PI feedback loss.

1: Detection of PI feedback loss.

Operation continues during detection, the fault relay is not operated.

2: Detection of PI feedback loss.

The motor coasts to stop at detection, and the fault relay operates.

Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as percentage using the maximum output frequency as 100%.

PI feedback loss detection time

Sleep function operation level

Sleep operation delay time

Accel/decel time for PI reference

Sets the PI feedback loss detection time.

Sets the sleep function start level as a frequency.

Sets the delay time until the sleep function starts.

Sets the accel/decel time for the PI

Softstarter (SFS).

PI Setpoint Selection

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Setting

Range

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 to

100

0 to 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

25.5

1.0 sec.

0.0 Hz No

0.0 sec.

A b5-19 PI Setpoint PI target value

0.00 to

100.00

0 Yes A b5-20

PI Setpoint Scaling

Sets the unit for b5-19, U1-38 and

U1-24

0: 0.01 Hz

1: 0.01% (the maximum output frequency E1-04 is taken as

100%.

2 – 39: rpm, set value is equal to motor poles

40 – 39999: User desired display

0 to

39999

1 No A

MEMO-

BUS

1AFH

1B0H

1B1H

1B2H

1B3H

1B4H

1B5H

1DCH

1DDH

1E2H

Page

6-87

Sets the display value for 100 %.

Sets the number of decimal digits.

b5-21

Sleep Function

Selection

Sets the operation method of the PI sleep function

0: PI Setpoint

1: SFS Input

2: Snooze

0 to 2 1 No A 1E3H

6-87

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range b5-22 b5-23

Snooze Level

Snooze Delay

Time b5-24 Wake-Up Level b5-25 Setpoint Boost

Sets the frequency level at which the snooze operation starts as percentage of the max. output frequency.

Sets a delay timer for the snooze function

Sets the feedback level at which the inverter wakes up from snooze operation.

Sets the PI setpoint boost when the snooze mode is activated. If it is reached once the output will be switched off. The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint.

Sets the maximum time the boost operation is performed.

b5-26

Maximum Boost

Time b5-27 b5-28

Snooze feedback

PI Feedback

Square Root

Operation

PI Snooze function will only be activated when the feedback value is above this parameter setting.

The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint.

Enables or disables the square root operation for the PI feedback value.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled b5-29

PI Feedback

Square Root Gain

Sets the gain for the feedback when square root operation is enabled.

b5-30

PI Output Monitor Square Root b5-31

PI unit selection

Selects whether the PI output monitor is shown as square root value or not.

0: Disable

1: Enable

Selects the units for the PI controller values (b5-19, U1-24, U1-38).

Refer to table

b5-31 Settings

for

the explanation of the setting range.

0 to

100

0 to

3600

0 to

100

0 to

100

0 to

3600

0 to

100

0 or 1

0 to

2.00

0 or 1

0 to 11

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0 sec.

60%

1.00

Yes

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1E4H

6-87

1E5H

6-87

1E6H

6-87

1E7H

6-87

1E8H

6-87

1E9H

6-87

1EAH

6-87

1EBH

6-87

1ECH

6-87

1EDH

6-87

*1. Parameter is moved into Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise the parameter is available only in Advanced Programming Mode.

*2. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator)

b5-31 Settings

Setting

Value

Function

WC: Inch of water column

PSI: lb/square inch

GPM: Gallons per minute

F: Degree Fahrenheit

CFM: Cubic feet per minute

CMH: Cubic meter per hour

LPH: Liters per hour

LPS: Liters per second

Displayed Unit

PSI

GPM

CFM

CMH

LPH

LPS

5-13

5-14

Setting

Value

Function

Bar: Bar

Pa: Pascal

C: Degree Celsius

Mtr: Meters

Displayed Unit

Bar

Mtr

Energy Saving: b8

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation b8-01 b8-04

Energy-saving mode selection

Energy-saving coefficient

Enables or disables the energy-saving function.

0: Disable

1: Enable

Sets the energy-saving coefficient.

Adjust the value in 5% steps until the output power becomes minimal.

0 or 1

0.0 to

655.00

b8-05

Power detection filter time constant

Sets the time constant for output power detection.

b8-06

Search operation voltage limiter

Sets the limit value of the voltage control range during search operation.

Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the motor rated voltage.

0 to

2000

0 to

100

20msec No

Access

Level

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.

MEMO-

BUS

Page

1CCH

6-98

1CFH

6-98

1D0H

6-98

1D1H

6-98

User Parameter Tables

Tuning Parameters: C

Acceleration/Deceleration: C1

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

C1-01

C1-02

C1-03

C1-04

C1-09

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

Acceleration time 2

Deceleration time 2

Emergency stop time

C1-11

Accel/decel time switching frequency

Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.

Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz.

Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.

Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/decel time 1” is set to ON.

0.0 to

6000.0

Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “Emergency

(fast) Stop” is set to ON.

Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.

If the output frequency is below the set frequency: Accel/decel time 2

If the output frequency is above the set frequency: Accel/decel time 1

The multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” has priority.

0.0 to

200.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS Register

10.0 sec.

Yes

0.0 Hz No

200H

201H

202H

203H

208H

20AH

Page

4-11

6-15

4-11

6-15

S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2

Parameter

Number

Name Description

C2-01

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel time will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.

Run command

OFF

Output frequency

C2-02

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.20

sec.

No A

C2-01

Time

0.00 to

2.50

MEMO-

BUS

Page

20BH

6-16

C2-02

S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

T accel

C2-01

C1-01

+ +

The S-Curve characteristic times at start and end of deceleration are fixed to 0.2 sec. and can not be changed.

0.20

sec.

No A 20CH

6-16

5-15

5-16

Torque Compensation: C4

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

C4-01

C4-02

Torque compensation gain

Torque compensation delay time constant

Sets the torque compensation gain.

Usually setting is not necessary.

Adjust under the following circumstances:

• When the motor cable is long increase the set value.

• When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.

• When the motor speed is oscillating, decrease the set values.

Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the

Inverter rated output current.

The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.

Usually setting is not necessary.

Adjust under the following circumstances:

• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.

• When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.

0.00 to

2.50

0 to

10000

1.00

Yes

200 ms No

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

215H

216H

Page

4-11

6-27

4-11

6-27

User Parameter Tables

Carrier Frequency: C6

Parameter

Number

Name

C6-01

Normal duty selection

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

Description

1: Normal Duty 1

2: Normal Duty 2

Selects the carrier frequency.

Select F to enable detailed settings using parameters C6-03 to C6-05.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

1 or 2 1 No A

MEMO-

BUS

223H

Page

6-2

0 to F

No A 224H

4-11

6-2

C6-03

Carrier frequency upper limit

Sets the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in kHz units.

The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:

2.0 to

15.0

*2 *3

15.0 kHz

C6-04

Carrier frequency lower limit

C6-05

Carrier frequency proportional gain

Carrier frequency

Output frequency x (C6-05) x K

Output frequency

(Max. output frequency)

K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03.

C6-03

≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3

10.0 kHz > C6-03

≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2

5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1

0.4 to

15.0

*2 *3

00 to

15.0 kHz

A 225H

6-2

226H

227H

6-2

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity and the protection class.

*2. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity.

*3. This parameter can only be set when C6-02 is set to F.

5-17

5-18

Reference Parameters: d

Preset Reference: d1

Parameter

Number

Name d1-01

Frequency reference 1 d1-02

Frequency reference 2 d1-03

Frequency reference 3 d1-04

Frequency reference 4 d1-17

Jog frequency reference

Description

Sets the frequency reference.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0.00

Yes

Access

Level

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multi-function input.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multi-function input.

Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and

2 are ON for multi-function inputs.

Sets the frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is ON.

0 to

FMAX

0.00

6.00

Yes

MEMO-

BUS

280H

281H

282H

283H

292H

Note:The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).

Page

6-7

6-62

Reference Limits: d2

Parameter

Number

Name Description d2-01 d2-02

Frequency reference upper limit

Frequency reference lower limit d2-03

Master speed reference lower limit

Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.

Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.

Sets the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

100.0%

0.0%

MEMO-

BUS

289H

28AH

293H

Page

6-24

6-55

6-24

6-55

6-24

6-55

Note:The PI Sleep Function is also available and can be used without enabled PI controller. It can be used to let the inverter switch off automatically when a minimum output frequency (set in b5-15) has been output for a time longer than b5-16. Refer also to page

User Parameter Tables

Jump Frequencies: d3

Parameter

Number

Name Description d3-01 Jump frequency 1 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 d3-03 Jump frequency 3

Sets the jump (resonance) frequencies in Hz.

The function is disabled when the jump frequency is set to 0 Hz.

Always ensure the following setting order: d3-01

≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03

Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration, the speed changes smoothly without jumping over the set frequencies d3-04

Jump frequency width

Sets the jump frequency bandwidth in Hz.

The jump frequency range will be the jump frequency ± d3-04.

Setting

Range

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

20.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.0 Hz No

1.0 Hz No

MEMO-

BUS

Page

294H

6-23

295H

6-23

296H

6-23

297H

6-23

Reference Frequency Hold: d4

Parameter

Number

Name d4-01

Frequency reference hold function selection d4-02

Trim Control

Level

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Sets whether or not frequency reference value on hold will be recorded.

0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again the frequency reference is set to 0.)

1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again the inverter starts at the previous hold frequency.)

This function is available when the multi-function inputs “Accel/Decel

Ramp Hold” or “UP/DOWN” commands are set.

Sets the frequency to be added to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percentage of the max. output frequency.

Enabled when the Trim control increase command or Trim control decrease command is set for a multi-function input.

0 or 1

0 to

100

10%

MEMO-

BUS

298H

Page

6-54

6-55

299H

6-58

5-19

5-20

Motor Parameters: E

V/f Pattern: E1

Parameter

Number

E1-03

V/f pattern selection

Name

E1-01

Input voltage setting

Description

Sets the Inverter input voltage.

This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

155 to

255

200 V

0 to E: Select from the 15 preset

F: patterns.

Custom user-set pattern

(Applicable for setting of E1-

04 to E1-10.)

FF: Custom user-set pattern without voltage and frequency limits

0 to F,

F No

E1-04

Max. output frequency

(FMAX)

Output Voltage (V)

0.0 to

200.0

50.0

E1-05

Max. output voltage (VMAX)

0.0 to

255.0

200.0

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

300H

Page

6-19

302H

303H

304H

E1-06

Base frequency

(FA)

E1-07

E1-08

E1-09

Mid. output frequency (FB)

Mid. output frequency voltage

(VB)

Min. output frequency (FMIN)

E1-10

Min. output frequency voltage

(VMIN)

Frequency (Hz)

0.0 to

200.0

50.0

To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and

E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-

08 will be disregarded.

Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:

E1-04 (FMAX)

≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07

(FB)

≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

0.0 to

255

15.0 V

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

255.0

1.2 Hz

9.0 V

E1-11

Mid. output frequency 2

E1-12

Mid. output frequency voltage 2

Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, this setting is not required.

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 Hz

0.0 V

0.0 to

200.0

2.5 Hz No

E1-13

Base voltage

(VBASE)

Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 V

305H

306H

307H

308H

309H

4-11

30AH

30BH

30CH

*1. Values for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class Inverter the values have to be doubled.

*2. Parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled when set to 0.0

User Parameter Tables

Motor Setup: E2

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

E2-01

E2-03

E2-05

Motor rated current

Sets the motor rated current.

This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.

This parameter is an input data for autotuning.

Motor no-load current

Motor line-to-line resistance

Sets the motor no-load current.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in

Ω units.

This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.

0.32 to

6.40

0.00 to

1.89

0.000

65.000

1.90 A

1.2 A

9.842

Access

Level

*1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

*2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given

*3. The setting range is 0.00 A to (E2-01 - 0.01 A).

MEMO-

BUS

30EH

Page

6-33

6-99

310H

6-99

312H

6-99

5-21

5-22

Option Parameters: F

Communications Option Cards: F6

Parameter

Number

Name Description

F6-01

F6-02

F6-03

F6-05

Operation selection after communications error

Set the stopping method for communications errors.

0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09

3: Continue operation

Option card external fault detection selection

0: Always detected

1: Detected only during operation

Option card external fault stopping method

Current scaling via communication option card

0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09

3: Continue operation

Sets the unit of the current monitor

0: Ampere

1: 100% 8192

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

0 to 3

0 or 1

0 to 3

0 or 1

3A2H

3A3H

3A4H

3A6H

Page

–

User Parameter Tables

Terminal Function Parameters: H

Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1

Parameter

Number

Name Description

H1-01

Terminal S3 function selection

Multi-function digital input 1

H1-02

Terminal S4 function selection

Multi-function digital input 2

H1-03

Terminal S5 function selection

Multi-function digital input 3

H1-04

Terminal S6 function selection

Multi-function digital input 4

H1-05

Terminal S7 function selection

Multi-function digital input 5

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

0 to 82

*1. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire-sequence.

3 (0)

4 (3)

6 (4)

400H

401H

402H

403H

404H

Page

–

Multi-function Digital Input Functions

Setting

Value

Function

3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)

Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)

Operation Source Option Card/Inverter selection (ON: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)

Multi-step speed reference 1

When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.

Multi-step speed reference 2

Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)

Acceleration/Deceleration time selection 1

External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)

External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)

Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency is hold)

Multi-function analog input A2 enable (ON: Enable)

Terminal not used

UP command (Always set with the DOWN command)

DOWN command (Always set with the UP command)

FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)

RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)

Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)

Emergency stop (NO: Deceleration to stop with deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)

Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop with deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)

Timer function input

(times are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in H2.)

PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)

Parameters write enable

(ON: All parameters can be set. OFF: All parameters are write protected.)

Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)

Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference.)

Analog frequency reference sample/hold (ON: reference is sampled and hold)

–

6-55

6-62

7-2

6-14

6-7

6-15

6-53

6-54

6-53

6-86

Page

6-10

6-52

6-60

6-7

6-87

6-58

6-59

5-23

5-24

Setting

Value

20 to 2F

6D*

6E*

PI control integral hold (ON: integral is hold)

PI soft starter disable (ON: disabled)

PI input characteristics switch

Operation Source Option/Inverter selection 2 (ON: option card)

Motor preheat command 1 (ON: Performs motor preheat)

External speed search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)

External speed search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)

External speed search command 3

Communications test mode

High Slip braking (HSB)

Jog Frequency 2

Drive enable (ON: Drive enabled)

Operation Source Communication/Inverter selection (ON: RS-422/485 port)

Operation Source Communication/Inverter selection 2 (ON: inverter settings)

AUTO mode selection (ON: AUTO mode active)

HAND mode selection (ON: HAND mode active)

Bypass Drive Enable (ON: Inverter enabled)

Function

External fault

Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, detection mode: normal/during operation

PI control integral reset

(ON: integral reset and hold as long as input is ON)

Motor Preheat 2 (ON: motor performs preheat 2)

Emergency Override Forward (ON: Inverter performs emergency override in forward direction)

Emergency Override Reverse (ON: Inverter performs emergency override in reverse direction)

* This setting is effective only, if the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used.

Multi-function Digital Outputs: H2

Parameter

Number

Name Description

H2-01

Terminal M1-M2 function selection

Multi-function digital output 1

H2-02

Terminal M3-M4 function selection

Multi-function digital output 2

Page

6-63

6-87

6-85

6-7

6-54

6-60

6-61

6-87

6-60

6-106

6-39

6-54

6-106

6-108

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

0 to 3D 0 No A 40BH

Page

–

0 to 3D 1 No A 40CH –

Multi-function Digital Output Functions

Setting

Value

Function

During run 1 (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)

Zero speed f ref

/f out

agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.) f ref

/f set

agree 1

(ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used and during frequency agree)

Frequency detection 1

(ON: +L4-01

≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, detection width L4-02 used)

Frequency detection 2

(ON: Output frequency

≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, detection width L4-02 used)

Page

6-64

6-65

6-25

User Parameter Tables

Setting

Value

Function

Inverter operation ready

READY: After start-up or no faults

During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection

During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock)

Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)

Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator)

Load detection NO (NO contact, ON: overload/loss of load detected)

Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)

Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPF01 has occurred.)

Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.)

Minor Fault (Alarm) (ON: Alarm displayed)

Fault reset command active

Timer function output

Load Detection NC (NC contact, OFF: overload/loss of load detected)

Reverse direction

Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)

During motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm

(ON: 90% or more of the detection level)

OH pre-alarm (temperature reached L8-02)

Drive enabled

Drive waiting (start delay time b1-11 is active)

During OH and reduced Frequency

RUN command from option card/communications

Cooling fan fault (ON: internal cooling fan error)

Page

6-65

6-66

6-86

6-30

6-66

6-45

6-33

6-66

6-65

6-30

6-44

6-65

Analog Inputs: H3

Parameter Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

H3-02 Terminal A1 gain

Sets the frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.

H3-03

H3-08

Terminal A1 bias

Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency set in E1-04.

Analog input A2 signal level selection

Selects the signal level input at multi-function analog input A2.

0: 0 to +10V (11 bit).

2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).

3: 0 to 20 mA (9-bit input)

H3-09

Analog input A2 function selection.

0.0 to

1000.0

-100.0 to

+100.0

0, 2, 3

Selects the multi-function analog input function for terminal A2.

Refer to the table

H3-09 Settings

for the explanation of the setting range.

0 to 1F

100.0% Yes

0.0%

Yes

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

411H

Page

6-21

412H

6-21

417H

6-21

418H

6-21

5-25

5-26

Parameter Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

H3-10 Terminal A2 gain

Sets the value of the function signal when 10 V (20 mA) is input as a percentage of the maximum value.

H3-11

H3-12

H3-13

Terminal A2 bias

Analog input filter time constant

Terminal A1/A2 switching

Sets input filter time constant for the two analog input terminals

(A1 and A2).

Effective for noise suppression etc.

Selects on which terminal the main frequency reference can be input.

0: Use analog input 1 on terminal

A1 for main frequency reference.

1: Use analog input 2 on terminal

A2 for main frequency reference.

0.0 to

1000.0

Sets the value of the function signal when 0 V (0/4 mA) is input as a percentage of the maximum value.

-100.0

+100.0

0.00 to

2.00

0 or 1

100.0% Yes

0.0%

0.30

sec.

Yes

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

419H

41AH

41BH

41CH

Page

6-21

*1. Parameter is also available in Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise parameter is only available in Advanced Programming Mode.

*2. Setting switched to “B” when PI controller is enabled

H3-09 Settings

Setting

Value

Function

Frequency bias

Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as frequency reference 2)

PI feedback

Frequency Bias 2

Motor temperature input

PI differential input

Analog input not used.

Contents (100%)

Maximum output frequency

–

Maximum output frequency

–

Page

6-22

6-7

6-87

6-22

6-35

6-87

–

User Parameter Tables

Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

H4-01

H4-02

Terminal FM monitor selection

Terminal FM gain

Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1) at terminal FM.

Sets the analog output FM gain.

Sets the percentage of the monitor value that is equal to 10 V output at terminal FM.

Note that the maximum output voltage is 10 V.

H4-03 Terminal FM bias

H4-04

Terminal AM monitor selection

Sets the analog output FM bias.

Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0 V output at terminal FM.

The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1) at terminal FM.

1 to 53

0 to

1000.0

-110.0 to

+110.0

1 to 53

H4-05

Terminal AM gain

Sets the analog output AM gain.

Sets the percentage of the monitor value that is equal to 10V output at terminal AM.

Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V.

0 to

1000.0

H4-06

H4-07

Terminal AM bias

Sets the analog output AM bias.

Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0 V output at terminal AM.

The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.

Terminal FM signal level selection

Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1 (terminal

FM)

0: 0 to +10 V output

2: 4 – 20 mA

-110.0 to

+110.0

0 or 2

H4-08

Terminal AM signal level selection

Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2 (terminal

AM)

0: 0 to +10 V output

2: 4 – 20 mA

0 or 2

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

100%

0.0%

Yes

50.0% Yes

Yes

*1. An analog output signal of 4 - 20 mA requires an optional terminal board (ETC618121) for current output

MEMO-

BUS

Page

41DH

6-67

41EH

6-67

41FH

6-67

420H

6-67

421H

6-67

422H

6-67

423H

6-67

424H

6-67

5-27

5-28

MEMOBUS Communications: H5

Parameter

Number

Name

H5-01 Station address

Description

Sets the Inverter's node address.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0 to 20

1F No A

MEMO-

BUS

425H

Page

6-69

H5-02

Communications speed selection

Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications.

0: 1200 bps

1: 2400 bps

2: 4800 bps

3: 9600 bps

4: 19200 bps

H5-03

H5-04

H5-05

Communications parity selection

Sets the parity for MEMOBUS communications.

0: No parity

1: Even parity

2: Odd parity

Stopping method after communications error

Sets the stopping method for communications errors.

0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1-02

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09

3: Continue operation

Communications error detection selection

Sets whether or not a communications time out is to be detected as a communications error.

0: Not detected

1: Detect

H5-06 Send wait time

H5-07

RTS control ON/

OFF

Sets the time the Inverter waits until a response is sent to the Master.

Enables or disables RTS control.

0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)

1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)

H5-08

Communication

Selection

Selects the Protocol for the Communication

0: Memobus

1: N2 (Metasys)

H5-09 CE detection time

Sets the time before CE error

(Communication error) is detected when MEMOBUS communication is used.

0 to 4

0 to 2

0 to 3

0 or 1

5 to 65 5 msec No

0 or 1

0, 1

0.0 to

10.0 sec

2.0 sec

*1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications

426H

427H

428H

429H

42AH

42BH

434H

435H

6-69

User Parameter Tables

Protection Function Parameters: L

Motor Overload: L1

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

L1-01

Motor protection selection

L1-02

Motor protection time constant

L1-03

L1-04

L1-05

Alarm operation selection during motor overheating

Motor overheating operation selection

Motor temperature input filter time constant

Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay.

0: Disabled

1: General-purpose motor protection (fan cooled motor)

2: Inverter motor protection

(externally cooled motor)

3:Vector motor protection

When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device.

Sets the electric thermal detection time in units of minutes.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.

When the motor's overload capability is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.

Selects the operation when the input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm detection level (1.17 V) (H3-09 must be set to E).

0: Decelerate to stop

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.

3: Continue operation (oH3 on the

Operator display flashes).

0 or 3

0.1 to

5.0

0 to 3

Selects the operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the overheating detection level (2.34 V) (H3-09 must be set to E).

0: Decelerate to stop

1: Coast to stop

2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.

Sets the delay time constant for the motor temperature (thermistor) input (H3-09=E) in seconds.

0 to 2

0.00 to

10.00

0.20 sec.

1.0 min No

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

480H

6-33

481H

6-33

482H

6-35

483H

6-35

484H

6-35

5-29

5-30

Power Loss Ride Through: L2

Parameter

Number

Name Description

L2-01

L2-02

L2-03

Momentary power loss detection

Momentary power loss ride through time

Min. baseblock time

L2-04

Voltage recovery time

L2-05

Undervoltage detection level

0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage

(UV1) detection)

1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the time set in L2-02. When L2-02 is exceeded, DC bus undervoltage is detected.)

2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power returns during control operations. Does not detect DC bus undervoltage.)

Ride through time, when Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2-01) is set to 1.

Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time, when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.

Set the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor time constant.

If an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.

Sets the time required to return the

Inverter output voltage from 0V to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.

Sets the main circuit undervoltage

(UV) detection level (main circuit

DC voltage).

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Setting

Range

0 to 2

0 to

25.5

0.1 to

5.0

0.0 to

5.0

150 to

210

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.1 sec.

0.3 sec.

190

VDC

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

*2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double

MEMO-

BUS

487H

488H

Page

485H

6-38

486H

6-38

6-39

6-38

6-39

489H

6-38

User Parameter Tables

Stall Prevention: L3

Parameter

Number

Name Description

L3-01

L3-02

Stall prevention level during accel

L3-04

L3-05

L3-06

Stall prevention selection during accel

Stall prevention selection during decel

Stall prevention selection during running

Stall prevention level during running

0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.

With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)

1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded.

Acceleration starts again when the current has fallen below the stall prevention level).

2: Intelligent acceleration mode

(Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. Set acceleration time is disregarded.)

Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or

Set as a percentage of Inverter rated current.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary. Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.

0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a

DC bus overvoltage may result.)

1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the DC bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level. Deceleration restarts when the voltage falls below the stall prevention level again.)

2: Intelligent deceleration mode

(Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that the

Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. The set deceleration time is disregarded.)

When a braking option (Braking

Unit) is used, always set to 0.

0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)

1: Deceleration using deceleration time 1 (C1-02.)

2: Deceleration using decelerationtime 2 (C1-04.)

Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.

Set as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.

Usually changing this setting is not necessary.

Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.

Setting

Range

0 to 2

0 to

200

0 to 2

30 to

200

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

120%

MEMO-

BUS

Page

48FH

6-17

490H

6-17

492H

6-19

493H

6-29

494H

6-29

5-31

5-32

Reference Detection: L4

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

L4-01

Speed agreement detection level

Sets the detection level for the reference detection function.

Effective when a multi-function output is set to:

- 3 ("f out

= f set

agree"),

- 4 ("Frequency detection 1") or

- 5 ("Frequency detection 2").

L4-02

Speed agreement detection width

Sets the hysteresis for the reference detection function.

Effective when a multi-function output is set to:

- 2 ("f ref

= f out

agree"),

- 3 ("f out

= f set

agree"),

- 4 ("Frequency detection 1") or

- 5 ( "Frequency detection 2").

L4-05

L4-06

Operation when frequency reference is missing

0: Deceleration to Stop

1: Operation continues at the frequency set in parameter L4-06.

Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference value drops over 90% in 400 ms.

Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss

Sets the frequency reference value as a percentage of the previous frequency reference, in case the frequency reference signal is lost.

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

20.0

0 or 1

0.0 to

100.0%

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

80%

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

499H

6-25

49AH

6-25

49DH

6-44

4C2H

6-44

Fault Restart: L5

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

L5-01

L5-02

Number of auto restart attempts

Auto restart operation selection

L5-03 Fault Retry time

Sets the number of auto restart attempts.

Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency.

Sets whether a fault relay is activated during fault restart.

0: No output (Fault relay is not activated.)

1: Output (Fault relay is activated.)

Sets the maximum time, the restart is tried.

0 to 10

0 or 1

0.5 to

180.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

10.0 sec

MEMO-

BUS

Page

49EH

6-45

49FH

6-45

4A0H

6-45

User Parameter Tables

Load Detection: L6

Parameter

Number

Name

L6-01

Load detection selection

L6-02

L6-03

Load detection level

Load detection time

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0: Load detection disabled.

1: Overload detection only at speed agree; operation continues (alarm).

2: Overload detection continuously during operation; operation continues (alarm).

3: Overload detection only at speed agree; coast to stop

(fault).

4: Overload detection continuously during operation; coast to stop (fault).

5: Loss of load detection only at speed agree; operation continues (alarm).

6: Loss of load detection continuously during operation; operation continues (alarm).

7: Loss of Load detection only at speed agree; coast to stop

(fault).

8: Loss of Load detection continuously during operation; coast to stop (fault).

Inverter rated current is set as

100%.

Sets the overload/loss of load detection time.

0 to 8

0 to

300

0.0 to

10.0

15%

10.0 sec.

MEMO-

BUS

4A1H

4A2H

4A3H

Page

6-30

5-33

5-34

Hardware Protection: L8

Parameter

Number

Name Description

L8-02

L8-03

L8-06

Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm

L8-09

Ground fault protection selection

L8-10

L8-11

Overheat prealarm level

Input Phase Loss

Detection Level

Cooling Fan control selection

Cooling fan control delay time

Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection prealarm in

°C.

Sets the operation for when the

Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.

0: Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1-02.

1: Coast to stop

2: Fast stop in fast-stop time

C1-09.

3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)

4: OH-Alarm and output frequency reduction (L8-19)

A fault will be given in setting 0 to

2 and a alarm will be given in setting 3 and 4.

Allowed DC bus ripple before

Input Phase Loss is detected.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting.

Sets the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.

0: ON only when RUN command is on

1: ON whenever inverter is powered up

Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is given.

L8-12

Ambient temperature

Set the ambient temperature.

L8-15

L8-18

L8-19

L8-32

OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds

Soft CLA selection

Frequency reference during OH pre-alarm

OH1 detection selection for fan failure

0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.

1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.

It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting.

0: Disable

1: Enable

It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting.

Sets the frequency reference when

OH pre-alarm is detected in percent of maximum frequency

Selects whether or not a failure of the internal fan leads to OH1.

0: Disabled

(FAN alarm is displayed)

1: Enabled (OH1 fault occurs)

Setting

Range

50 to

130

0 to 4

0.0 to

25.0%

0 or 1

0 to

300

45 to

0 or 1

0.0 to

100.0

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

°C *1

300 sec.

°C

20.0%

MEMO-

BUS

Page

4AEH

6-47

4AFH

6-47

4B2H

6-48

4B5H

6-48

4B6H

6-49

4B7H

6-49

4B8H

6-49

4BBH

6-50

4BEH

6-51

4BFH

6-47

4E2H

6-49

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity and the protection class. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW in protection class IP00 or IP20 / NEMA 1 is given.

User Parameter Tables

Special Adjustments: n

Hunting Prevention Function: n1

Parameter

Number

Name Description n1-01

Hunting prevention function selection

0: Hunting prevention function disabled

1: Hunting prevention function enabled

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 or 1 1 n1-02

Hunting prevention gain

Sets the hunting prevention gain.

0.00 to

2.50

1.00

580H

6-28

581H

4-11

6-28

High Slip Braking: n3

Parameter

Number

Name n3-01

High Slip braking deceleration frequency width n3-02

High Slip braking current limit

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Sets the frequency width for deceleration during High Slip braking in percent of FMAX (E1-04).

1 to 20 5%

Sets the current limit for deceleration during High Slip braking in percent of the motor rated current.

The resulting limit must be 120% of the Inverter rated current or less.

100 to

200

150%

No n3-03

High Slip braking stop dwell time n3-04

High Slip braking OL7 time

Sets the dwell time for the output frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz) after

High Slip Braking.

Sets the time until OL7 occurs if the output frequency does not change for any reason during High

Slip braking.

0.0 to

10.0

1.0 sec.

30 to

1200

40 sec.

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

588H

589H

58AH

58BH

quency reference related monitors

5-35

5-36

Digital Operator Parameters: o

Monitor Select: o1

Parameter

Number o1-01

Monitor selection

*1 o1-02

Monitor selection after power up o1-03

Name

Digital operator display scaling

Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Sets the number of the 4th monitor item to be displayed in the Drive

Mode (U1).

(Only on LED Digital Operator.)

Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.

1: Frequency reference

2: Output frequency

3: Output current

4: The monitor item set for o1-01

Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.

0: 0.01 Hz units

1: 0.01% units (Maximum output frequency is 100%)

2 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor poles.)

40 to 39999: User desired display

Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.

6 to 53

1 to 4

0 to

39999

Yes

MEMO-

BUS

500H

501H

502H

Page

6-110

6-111

o1-05 LCD-Focus o1-06

Monitor Mode

Selection

o1-07

2nd Monitor

Selection

Sets the value that is to be displayed at

100% excluding the decimal point.

Sets the number of decimal places.

Example: When the max. output value is 200.0, set 12000

Sets the brightness on the LCD

Digital Operator.

0: light

3: normal

5: dark

0: Below the active monitor parameter the next 2 sequential monitors are displayed.

1: Below the active monitor the 2 monitors specified by o1-07 and o1-08 are locked

Selects the monitor that is displayed and locked in the second line of the operator display.

0 to 5

0 or 1

1 to 53

Yes

504H

517H

518H

–

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name Description o1-08

3rd Monitor

Selection

o1-09

Frequency reference display unit selection

Selects the monitor that is displayed and locked in the third line of the operator display.

Sets the unit display for the fre-

when o1-03

P 40. Refer to

o1-09

Settings

for the setting range.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

1 to 53

0 to 11

*1. Parameter function is only valid if the LED Digital Operator is used.

*2. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator).

MEMO-

BUS

519H

Page

–

619H

6-111

o1-09 Settings

Setting

Value

Function

WC: Inch of water column

PSI: lb/square inch

GPM: Gallons per minute

F: Degree Fahrenheit

CFM: Cubic feet per minute

CMH: Cubic meter per hour

LPH: Liters per hour

LPS: Liters per second

Bar: Bar

Pa: Pascal

C: Degree Celsius

Mtr: Meters

Displayed Unit

PSI

GPM

CFM

CMH

LPH

LPS

Bar

Mtr

5-37

5-38

Multi-function Selections: o2

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation o2-01 o2-02 o2-03

LOCAL/

REMOTE key enable/disable

Enables/disables the LOCAL/

REMOTE key

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Switches between the

Digital Operator and the parameter settings b1-01, b1-02.)

STOP key during control circuit terminal opera-

tion

Enables/disables the STOP key

0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an external terminal, the Stop key is disabled.)

1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)

User parameter initial value

Clears or stores user initial values.

0: Stored/not set

1: Begins storing

(Records the set parameters as user initial values.)

2: Clearing memory (Clears all recorded user initial values)

When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values,

1110 can be set in A1-03 to recall them.

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 kVA selection

Frequency reference setting method selection

Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected

Cumulative operation time setting

Cumulative operation time selection

Initialize Mode

Do not set unless after replacing

the control board. (Refer to

page 5-

for the setting values)

When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not.

0: Enter key needed

1: Enter key not needed

Sets the operation when the Digital

Operator is disconnected.

0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the Digital Operator is disconnected.)

1: Enabled (OPR is detected at

Digital Operator disconnection.

Inverter output is switched off, and fault relay is operated.)

Sets the cumulative operation time.

The operation time is accumulated form the set value.

0: Accumulated Inverter power on time

1: Accumulated Inverter run time.

2: Europe Spec.

5: PV-E Spec.

6: Chinese Spec.

0 to FF

0 or 1

0 to

65535

0 or 1

2, 5, 6

0 hrs

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

505H

506H

507H

508H

5-47

509H

50AH

50BH

50CH

50DH

Page

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name Description o2-10 o2-12 o2-14 o2-15 o2-17

Fan operation time setting

Standard / IP54

Selection

Sets the initial value of the fan operation time.

The fan operation time is accumulated from the set value.

Fault trace initialize kWh monitor initialize

0: No change

1: Initialized. After setting ”1“ o2-

12 will return to ”0“

Resets the monitor parameters

U1-29 and U1-30 back to zero.

0: No change

1: Reset to zero

HAND Key function selection

If set to 0 the HAND key on the

HOA Digital Operator is disabled and the Inverter will not enter the

HAND mode and start to run when the HAND key is pressed.

0: HAND key disabled

1: HAND key enabled

Selects whether the Inverter is in standard (IP00 or NEMA 1 / IP20) or IP54 protection class.

0: IP00 or NEMA 1 / IP20

1: IP54

Setting

Range

0 to

65535

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0 hr.

*1. This parameter is effective only when the LED or LCD Digital Operator is used.

*2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

*3. This parameter is effective only when the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used.

*4. Factory setting depends on the protection class of the Inverter.

*5. The access level depends on the setting of o2-09: When o2-09 is set to “2” or “5” parameter o2-17 is accessable.

MEMO-

BUS

50EH

511H

512H

513H

51BH

Page

U1-02 Output frequency Monitors the output frequency.

6-113

Copy Function: o3

Parameter

Number

Name Description o3-01

Copy function selection o3-02

Read permission selection

0: Normal operation

1: READ (Inverter to Operator)

2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)

3: Verify (compare)

0: READ prohibited

1: READ permitted

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

Page

0 to 3

0 or 1

515H

6-113

516H

6-113

5-39

5-40

Motor Autotuning: T

Parameter

Number

Name

T1-02

Motor output power

Description

Set the output power of the motor in Kilowatts.

Setting

Range

0.00 to

650.00

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

0.40 kW

Access

Level

MEMO-

BUS

702H

Page

4-7

T1-04

Motor rated current

Set the rated current of the motor in

Amps.

0.32 to

6.40

1.90 A

No A 704H

4-7

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

*2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

User Parameter Tables

Monitor Parameters: U

Status Monitor Parameters: U1

Parameter

Number

Name

U1-01

Frequency reference

Description

Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.

Output Signal Level During Multi-

Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

10 V: Max. frequency

0.01

MEMO-

BUS

40H

41H

U1-03 Output current Monitors the output current.

U1-06 Output voltage

Monitors the output voltage reference.

U1-07 DC bus voltage Monitors the DC bus voltage.

U1-08 Output power Monitors the output power.

10 V: Inverter rated output current

0.01

10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)

0.1

10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC) 1 V

10 V: Inverter capacity

(max. applicable motor capacity)

0.1 kW

42H

45H

46H

47H

U1-10

Input terminal status

Shows input ON/OFF status.

1: FWD command

(S1) is ON

1: REV command

(S2) is ON

1: Multi input 1

(S3) is ON

1: Multi input 2

(S4) is ON

1: Multi input 3

(S5) is ON

1: Multi input 4

(S6) is ON

1: Multi input 5

(S7) is ON

(Cannot be output.) – 49H

U1-11

Output terminal status

Shows output ON/OFF status.

1: Multi-function digital output 1

(M1-M2) is ON

1: Multi-function digital output 2

(M3-M4) is ON

Not used

(Always 0).

1: Error output

(MA/MB-MC) is

U1-12 Operation status

Inverter operating status.

1: Run

1: Zero speed

1: Reverse

1: Reset signal

input

1: Speed agree

1: Inverter ready

1: Minor fault

1: Major fault

(Cannot be output.)

– 4AH

– 4BH

5-41

5-42

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Output Signal Level During Multi-

Function Analog Output

U1-13

Cumulative operation time

Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.

The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.

(Cannot be output.)

U1-14

Software No.

(flash memory)

(Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.)

U1-15

U1-16

U1-18

U1-20

U1-24

U1-28

Terminal A1 input level

Terminal A2 input level

Motor secondary current (Iq)

Output frequency after softstarter (SFS output)

PI feedback value

Software No.

(CPU)

Monitors the input level of analog input A1. A value of 100% equals

10V input.

10 V: 100%

Monitors the input level of analog input A2. A value of 100% equals

10V/20mA input.

10 V/20mA: 100%

Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current.

The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.

10 V:Motor rated current

Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter.

This frequency value does not include compensations, such as

slip compensation.

10 V: Max. frequency

Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used.

10 V: 100% feedback value

(CPU software No.) (Cannot be output.)

U1-29 kWh display

U1-30 MWh display

Monitors the 4 lower digits, kWh display.

(Cannot be output.)

Monitors the 5 higher digits,

MWh display.

(Cannot be output.)

Min.

Unit

1 hr.

–

0.1% 4EH

0.1% 4FH

0.1% 51H

0.01

–

1 kWh

0.1

MW h

MEMO-

BUS

4CH

4DH

53H

57H

5BH

5CH

5DH

U1-31 LED Test

U1-34

OPE fault parameter

For testing LEDs on operator. If this monitor is selected, all

LED’s light up (only on LED operator).

(Cannot be output.)

Shows the first parameter number when an OPE fault is detected.

(Cannot be output.)

–

3CH

61H

U1-36 PI input volume

U1-37 PI output volume

U1-38 PI setpoint

PI input volume

PI control output

PI setpoint

10 V: 100% PI input

10 V: 100% PI output

10 V: 100% PI setpoint

0.01

63H

64H

65H

User Parameter Tables

Parameter

Number

Name

U1-39

MEMOBUS communications error code

Description

Shows MEMOBUS errors.

Output Signal Level During Multi-

Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

MEMO-

BUS

1: CRC error

1: Data length error

Not used

(always 0)

1: Parity error

1: Overrun error

1: Framing error

1: Timeout

Not used

(always 0)

(Cannot be output.) – 66H

U1-40

U1-51

U1-52

Cooling fan operating time

Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan. The time can be set in o2-10.

(Cannot be output.)

Frequency reference at AUTO operation

Frequency reference at HAND operation

U1-53 PI feedback 2

Monitors the value of the frequency reference when AUTO operation is active.

Monitors the value of the frequency reference when HAND operation is active.

Monitors the feedback value of the PI fdbk2 input when Differential PI is selected (H3=6B)

10 V: Max. frequency

10V: 100% feedback value

*1. The monitor parameter can be scaled in o1-03, the unit can be set in o1-09.

*2. The monitor parameters will be moved up to 2nd and 3rd position when the PI controller is enabled.

*3. The monitor parameter can be scaled in b5-20, the unit can be set in b5-31.

1 hr.

0.01

68H

72H

73H

74H

5-43

5-44

Fault Trace: U2

Parameter

Number

Name

U2-01 Current fault

Description

The content of the current fault.

Output Signal Level During

Multi-Function Analog Output

Min.

Unit

MEMO-

BUS

– 80H

U2-02 Last fault The error content of the last fault.

U2-03

Reference frequency at fault

U2-04 Output frequency at fault

The reference frequency when the last fault occurred.

The output frequency when the last fault occurred.

U2-05 Output current at fault

U2-08 DC bus voltage at fault

The output current when the last fault occurred.

U2-07

Output voltage reference at fault

The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred.

The DC bus voltage when the last fault occurred.

U2-09 Output power at fault

The output power when the last fault occurred.

U2-11

U2-12

Input terminal status at fault

Output terminal status at fault

U2-13 Operation status at fault

The input terminal status when the last fault occurred.

The format is the same as for U1-10.

The output terminal status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.

The operating status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.

U2-14

Cumulative operation time at fault

The operating time when the last fault occurred.

Note: The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.

(Cannot be output.)

– 81H

0.01

0.1

82H

83H

84H

86H

87H 1 V

0.1 kW

88H

–

1 hr.

8AH

8BH

8CH

8DH

User Parameter Tables

Fault History: U3

Parameter

Number

U3-01 Last fault

Name Description

U3-02 Second last fault

The error content of 1st last fault.

The error content of 2nd last fault.

The error content of 3rd last fault.

U3-03 Third last fault

U3-04 Fourth last fault The error content of 4th last fault.

U3-05

Cumulative operation time at fault

The total operating time when the

1st previous fault occurred.

U3-06

Accumulated time of second fault

U3-07

Accumulated time of third fault

U3-08

Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault

The total operating time when the

2nd previous fault occurred.

The total operating time when the

3rd previous fault occurred.

The total operating time when the

4th previous fault occurred.

Output Signal Level During

Multi-Function Analog Output

(Cannot be output.)

Min.

Unit

–

MEMO-

BUS

90H

–

1 hr.

91H

92H

93H

94H

95H

96H

U3-09

–

U3-14

Fifth last to tenth last fault

The error content of the 5th to

10th last fault

U3-15

–

U3-20

Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault

Total generating time when 5th...

10th previous fault occurred

–

1hr

97H

804

805H

806H

807H

808H

809H

806H

80FH

810H

811H

812H

813H

Note:The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.

5-45

5-46

Setting Values that Change with the V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03)

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW

Parameter

Number

E1-03

E1-04

E1-05

Unit Factory Setting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F FF

Hz 50.0

60.0

72.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

90.0

120.0

180.0

50.0

V 200.0

200.0

E1-06

E1-07

Hz 50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

Hz 2.5

3.0

25.0

30.0

2.5

3.0

2.5

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

V 15.0

15.0

35.0

50.0

35.0

50.0

19.0

24.0

19.0

24.0

15.0

12.0

1.3

9.0

1.5

9.0

1.5

9.0

1.5

9.0

1.3

8.0

1.3

9.0

1.5

8.0

1.5

9.0

1.3

1.5

11.0

13.0

11.0

15.0

9.0

1.5

9.0

1.5

9.0

1.2

9.0

1.2

6.0

*1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double

200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW

Parameter

Number

E1-03

E1-04

E1-05

Unit Factory Setting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F FF

Hz 50.0

60.0

72.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

90.0

120.0

180.0

50.0

V 200.0

200.0

E1-06

E1-07

Hz 50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

Hz 2.5

3.0

25.0

30.0

2.5

3.0

2.5

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

V 14.0

14.0

35.0

50.0

35.0

50.0

18.0

23.0

18.0

23.0

14.0

15.0

1.3

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.3

6.0

1.3

7.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

7.0

1.3

9.0

1.3

1.5

11.0

9.0

1.5

13.0

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

7.0

1.2

7.0

1.2

9.0

*1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double

200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW

Parameter

Number

E1-03

E1-04

E1-05

Unit Factory Setting

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F FF

Hz 50.0

60.0

72.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

90.0

120.0

180.0

50.0

V 200.0

200.0

E1-06

E1-07

Hz 50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

Hz 2.5

3.0

25.0

30.0

2.5

3.0

2.5

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

V 12.0

12.0

35.0

50.0

35.0

50.0

15.0

20.0

15.0

20.0

12.0

14.0

1.3

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.3

5.0

1.3

6.0

1.5

5.0

1.5

6.0

1.3

7.0

1.3

9.0

1.5

7.0

1.5

11.0

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.5

6.0

1.2

6.0

1.2

7.0

*1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double

User Parameter Tables

Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

200 V Class Inverters

Parameter

Number

– o2-04

Name

Inverter Capacity kVA selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

Unit Factory Setting kW

–

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

– 288.20

223.70

169.40

156.80

122.90

94.75

72.69

70.44

63.13

Normal Duty 1 –

Normal Duty 2 –

E2-01

E2-03

Motor rated current

Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

L2-02

Momentary power loss ride through time

1.90

1.20

3.30

1.80

6.20

2.80

8.50

3.00

14.00

4.50

19.60

5.10

26.60

8.00

39.7

11.2

53.0

15.2

W 9.842

5.156

1.997

1.601

0.771

0.399

0.288

0.230

0.138

sec.

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.5

1.0

2.0

L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time

L2-04 Voltage recovery time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

L8-06 Input phase loss detection level sec.

sec.

°C

0.1

0.3

5.0

0.2

0.3

7.5

0.3

10.0

0.4

0.3

12.0

0.5

0.3

12.0

0.6

0.3

10.0

0.7

0.3

17.0

0.8

0.3

21.0

0.9

0.3

17.0

*1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.

Parameter

Number

– o2-04

Name

Inverter Capacity kVA selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

Unit Factory Setting kW 18.5

– 9

–

110

57.87

51.79

46.27

38.16

35.78

31.35

23.10

Normal Duty 1 –

Normal Duty 2 –

E2-01

E2-03

Motor rated current

Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

L2-02

Momentary power loss ride through time

65.8

15.7

77.2

18.5

105.0

21.9

131.0

38.2

160.0

44.0

190.0

45.6

260.0

72.0

260.0

72.0

260.0

72.0

W 0.101

0.079

0.064

0.039

0.030

0.022

0.023

sec.

2.0

L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time

L2-04 Voltage recovery time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

L8-06 Input phase loss detection level sec.

sec.

°C

1.0

0.6

15.0

1.0

0.6

24.0

1.1

0.6

20.0

1.1

0.6

18.0

1.2

0.6

20.0

1.2

1.0

17.0

1.3

1.0

16.0

1.5

1.0

18.0

1.7

1.0

20.0

5-47

5-48

400 V Class Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20

Parameter

Number

– o2-04

Name

Inverter Capacity kVA selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-03 Motor no-load current

Normal

Duty 1

Normal

Duty 2

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

L2-02

Momentary power loss ride through time

L2-03

Min. baseblock (BB) time

L2-04

Voltage recovery time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

L8-06 Input phase loss detection

Unit kW

–

0.75

1.5

2.2

Factory Setting

3.7

4.0

5.5

7.5

– 576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26

–

A sec.

sec.

0.3

°C

0.4

1.00

0.60

0.1

5.0

1.60

0.80

W 38.198 22.459 10.100

6.495

3.333

1.595

1.152

0.922

0.550

0.1

0.2

0.3

7.5

3.10

1.40

0.2

0.3

10.0

4.20

1.50

0.3

0.4

0.3

10.0

7.00

2.30

0.5

0.3

12.0

7.00

2.30

0.5

0.6

0.3

10.0

9.80

2.60

0.8

0.6

0.3

10.0

13.30

4.00

0.8

0.7

0.3

20.0

19.9

5.6

1.0

0.8

0.3

23.0

26.5

7.6

2.0

0.9

0.3

17.0

Parameter Number

– o2-04

Name

Inverter Capacity kVA selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

Normal

Duty 1

Normal

Duty 2

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

L2-02

Momentary power loss ride through time

L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time

L2-04 Voltage recovery time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

L8-06 Input phase loss detection

Unit kW

–

18.5

Factory Setting

110

132

– 115.74 103.58

92.54

76.32

71.56

67.20

46.20

41.22

36.23

33.18

–

A sec.

sec.

°C

32.9

7.8

W 0.403

0.316

0.269

0.155

0.122

0.088

0.092

0.056

0.046

0.035

2.0

1.0

0.6

17.0

38.6

9.2

2.0

1.0

0.6

20.0

52.3

10.9

2.0

1.1

0.6

20.0

65.6

19.1

2.0

1.1

0.6

20.0

79.7

22.0

2.0

1.2

0.6

20.0

95.0

24.0

2.0

1.2

1.0

100

20.0

130.0

36.0

2.0

1.3

1.0

20.0

156.0

40.0

2.0

1.5

1.0

110

16.0

190.0

49.0

2.0

1.7

1.0

110

16.0

223.0

58.0

2.0

1.7

1.0

110

16.0

User Parameter Tables

Parameter Number

– o2-04

Name

Inverter Capacity kVA selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

Normal Duty 1

Normal Duty 2

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-03 Motor no-load current

A 270.0

310.0

370.0

500.0

A 70.0

81.0

96.0

130.0

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance W 0.029

0.025

0.020

0.014

L2-02 Momentary power loss ride through time sec.

2.0

L2-03

L2-04

L8-02

L8-06

Min. baseblock (BB) time

Voltage recovery time

Overheat pre-alarm level

Input phase loss detection level

Unit kW

–

– sec.

sec.

°C

1.8

1.0

108

14.0

Factory Setting

160

185

220

300

30.13

30.57

27.13

21.76

1.9

1.0

15.0

2.0

1.0

100

15.0

2.1

1.0

108

15.0

400 V Class Inverters in Protection Class IP54

Parameter Number

– o2-04

Name

Inverter Capacity kVA selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient

C6-02

Carrier frequency selection

E2-01 Motor rated current

E2-03 Motor no-load current

E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance

L2-02

Momentary power loss ride through time

L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time

L2-04 Voltage recovery time

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level

L8-06 Input phase loss detection

Unit kW

–

7.5

18.5

–

145.38 140.88 126.26 115.74 103.58

92.54

76.32

71.56

67.20

– 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

13.30

19.9

26.5

32.9

38.6

52.3

65.6

79.7

95.0

A 4.00

5.6

7.6

7.8

9.2

10.9

19.1

22.0

24.0

1.152

0.922

0.550

0.403

0.316

0.269

0.155

0.122

0.088

sec.

0.8

1.0

2.0

Factory Setting

2.0

sec.

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

1.2

sec.

0.3

°C

0.3

0.6

1.0

20.0

23.0

17.0

20.0

5-49

5-50

Parameter Settings by

Function

Carrier Frequency Selection ..............................................6-2

Frequency Reference ........................................................6-5

Run Command...................................................................6-9

Stopping Methods ............................................................6-11

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ................6-15

Adjusting Frequency References.....................................6-21

Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function).........6-24

Frequency Detection........................................................6-25

Improved Operating Performance....................................6-27

Machine Protection ..........................................................6-29

Automatic Restart ............................................................6-38

Inverter Protection............................................................6-47

Input Terminal Functions .................................................6-52

Output Terminal Functions...............................................6-64

Monitor Parameters .........................................................6-67

Individual Functions .........................................................6-69

Digital Operator Functions .............................................6-110

Carrier Frequency Selection

Setting the Carrier Frequency

Using the following parameters the carrier frequency setting can be fitted to the applications requirements.

Related Parameters

Parameter

No.

Name

C6-01 Normal duty selection

C6-02 Carrier frequency selection

C6-03 Carrier frequency upper limit

C6-04 Carrier frequency lower limit

Setting

Range

1 or 2

0 to F

2.0 to

15.0

*2 *3

0.4 to

15.0

*2*3

00 to 99

Factory

Setting

15.0 kHz

Changes

During

Operation?

Access

Level

A C6-05 Carrier frequency proportional gain

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.

*2. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity.

*3. This parameter can only be set when C6-02 is set to F.

Carrier Frequency, Current Derating and Overload Capability in Normal Duty 1 and 2

The Inverter overload capability depends among other things on the carrier frequency setting. If the carrier frequency setting is higher than the factory setting, the overload current capability must be reduced.

Further, Normal Duty 2 enables a higher continuous output current before the Inverter overload calculation is started.

Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and IP20 / NEMA 1 and Normal Duty 1

In Normal Duty 1 the default carrier frequency depends on the Inverter capacity. With the default setting the overload capability is 120% of the rated output current for 1 minute. If the carrier frequency is set to a higher value, the overload capability is reduced as shown in

Fig 6.1

200V Class 37 to 90kW

400V Class 75 to 110kW

200V Class 0.4 to 22kW

400V Class 0.4 to 22kW

120%

96%

90%

400V Class 132kW

400V Class 160kW

200V Class 30kW

400V Class 30 to 55kW

6-2

Carrier Freq.

5kHz 8kHz 10kHz 15kHz

Fig 6.1 Overload Capability depending on Carrier Frequency (IP00 and IP20 / NEMA 1) in Normal Duty 1

Carrier Frequency Selection

Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and IP20 / NEMA 1 and Normal Duty 2

In the Normal Duty 2 mode the maximum carrier frequency is decreased compared to the Normal Duty 1 mode but the short term overload capability is increased. No further increase of the carrier frequency is possi-

ble. Refer to

Fig 6.2

for the overload capability of both modes and to

page 5-47, Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

for the carrier frequency default settings in Normal Duty 2

100

0.1

100 110 120 130 140 150 160

Overload Level [%]

Normal Duty 1

170

Normal Duty 2

180

Fig 6.2 Normal Duty 1 and 2 Inverter Overload Detection Curve

190 200

Inverters in Protection Class IP54

The default carrier frequency setting is 5kHz for all Inverters in protection class IP54. If the carrier frequency is set to a higher value than the factory setting, the overload capability is reduced as shown in

Fig 6.3

. For

IP54 Inverters the setting Heavy Duty 2 is not available.

120%

400V class 22 to 55kW (IP54)

96%

400V class 7.5kW to 18.5kW (IP54)

72%

5 kHz

10 kHz

15 kHz

Carrier Frequency

Fig 6.3 Overload Capability depending on Carrier Frequency (IP54)

6-3

6-4

Setting Precautions

Carrier Frequency Selection

When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:

•

If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.

Wiring Length

C6-02 (carrier frequency) setting

50 m or less

0 to 6 (15 kHz)

100 m or less

0 to 4 (10 kHz)

Over 100 m

0 to 2 (5 kHz)

•

If speed and torque oscillate at low speeds: Decrease the carrier frequency.

•

If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Decrease the carrier frequency.

•

If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Decrease the carrier frequency.

•

If metallic noise from the motor is large: Increase the carrier frequency.

•

The carrier frequency can be set to vary depending on the output frequency as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and

C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).

Carrier Frequency

C6-03

C6-04

Output frequency x C6-05 x K

Output frequency

E1-04

Max. Output Frequency

Fig 6.4 Carrier Frequency Gain

* K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.

C6-03

≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3

10.0 kHz > C6-03

≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2

5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1

•

To fix the carrier frequency to any desired value, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.

An OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur in the following cases:

•

If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04

•

If C6-02 is set from 7 to E.

Frequency Reference

This section explains how to input the frequency reference.

Selecting the Frequency Reference Source

Set parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number b1-01 Reference selection

Name

Setting

Range

0 to 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Input the Frequency Reference from the Digital Operator

When b1-01 is set to 0, the frequency reference can be input from the Digital Operator.

For details on setting the frequency reference, refer to

Chapter 3, Digital Operator and Modes

-DRIVE-

Frequency Ref

Rdy

"0.00Hz"

Fig 6.5 Frequency Setting Display with LED and LCD Digital Operator

Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)

When b1-01 is set to 1, the frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input), or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).

Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only

If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal

A1.

Inverter

2 k

+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)

A1 (Master frequency reference)

A2 (Auxiliary frequency reference)

AC (Analog common)

Fig 6.6 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input

6-5

6-6

2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary

If 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies is performed, input the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.

When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 input (master speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 input (auxiliary speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference.

2 k

Master/

Auxiliary

2 k

0 to 10 V input

Inverter

S3 Multi-step speed

command 1

SN Digital input neutral

+V (Power supply: 15 V,

20 mA)

A1 (Master frequency

reference)

A2 (Auxiliary frequency

reference)

AC (Analog common)

DIP switch S1

Fig 6.7 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input

Setting Precautions

When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 to switch to voltage input

(factory setting is ON).

Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current

When b1-01 is set to 1, the frequency reference can be input from control circuit terminal A2. Input the current

(4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.

When H3-09 (Multi-Function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set to 0 (factory setting) the input on A2 is added to A1.

Inverter

4 to 20 mA

+V (Power supply: 15 V,

A1(Auxiliary frequency

A2(Master frequency

AC (Analog common)

DIP switch S1

Fig 6.8 Frequency Reference Using Current

Setting Precautions

•

When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).

•

If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.

Frequency Reference

Using Multi-Step Speed Operation

With Varispeed E7 series Inverters the speed can be changed in a maximum of 5 steps, using 4 multi-step frequency references and one jog frequency reference.

The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 5-step operation using multi-step references 1 and 2 and jog frequency selection functions.

Related Parameters

To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 and 2 and the jog reference selection in the multifunction digital inputs.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-04)

Terminal

Parameter

Number

Set Value

H1-03

H1-04

H1-05

Details

Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)

Multi-step speed command 2

Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)

Combining Multi-Step Speed References and Multi-Function Digital Inputs

The frequency reference can be changed by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S6 (multi-function digital input terminals). The following table shows the possible combinations.

Speed

Terminal S5

Multi-step Speed

Command 1

OFF

–

Terminal S6

Multi-step Speed

Command 2

OFF

–

Terminal S7

Jog Frequency

Selection

OFF

Selected Frequency

Frequency reference 1, d1-01, master speed frequency

Frequency reference 2, d1-02, auxiliary frequency

Frequency reference 3, d1-03

Frequency reference 4, d1-04

Jog frequency d1-17

*1. Terminal S6's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.

Setting Precautions

When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.

•

When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1 set b1-01 to 1, when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference

1) to step 1 set b1-01 to 0.

•

When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2 set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2 set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).

6-7

6-8

Connection Example and Time Chart

The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step operation.

Inverter

Forward/stop

Reverse/stop

Fault reset

Multi-step command 1

Multi-step command 2

Jog frequency

External fault

Digital input neutral

Frequency reference

Fig 6.9 Control Circuit Terminal During 5-step Operation

Frequency reference 3

Frequency reference 2

Frequency reference 1

Frequency reference 4

Jog frequency

Forward/stop

Multi-step speed command 1

Multi-step speed command 2

OFF

Jog frequency selection

OFF

Fig 6.10 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart

Note:

•

The multifunction input setting “Jog Frequency 2” (69) can be used for jog frequency selection when a

3-wire control is used for the control circuit. If it is selected while the inverter is initialized to 2-wire control an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.

Run Command

This section explains input methods for the run command.

Selecting the Run Command Source

Set parameter b1-02 to select the source for the run command.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-02 Operation method selection

Setting

Range

0 to 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator

When b1-02 is set to 0, the Inverter can be operated using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, and FWD/

REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to

Chapter 3, Digital Operator and Modes

Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals

When b1-02 is set to 1, Inverter operation can be performed using the control circuit terminals.

Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Control

The factory setting is set to a 2-wire control. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop.

Inverter

Forward/Stop

Reverse/Stop

Digital input neutral

Fig 6.11 2-Wire Control Wiring Example with Positive Logic

6-9

6-10

Performing Operations Using 3-Wire Control

When any parameter from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire control, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set to 0 works as a forward/reverse selection command terminal.

When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.

Stop switch

(NC contact)

Operation switch

(NO contact)

Run command (operates when ON)

Stop command (stopped when ON)

Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)

Digital input neutral

Fig 6.12 3-Wire Control Wiring Example

Run command

Stop command

Forward/reverse command

50 ms min.

Can be either ON or OFF

OFF

(stopped)

OFF (forward)

ON (reverse)

Motor speed

Stop Forward Reverse

Fig 6.13 Three-wire Control Time Chart

Stop Forward

NOTE

Use a control circuit that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run command self-holding in the Inverter.

Stopping Methods

This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.

Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input

There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:

•

Deceleration to stop

•

Coast to stop

•

DC braking stop

•

Coast to stop with timer

Set parameter b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-03 Stopping method selection b2-01

Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency) b2-02 DC injection braking current b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop

Setting

Range

0 to 3

0.0 to

10.0

0 to

100

0.00

10.00

Factory

Setting

0.5 Hz

50%

0.50 sec.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

6-11

6-12

Deceleration to Stop

If the stop command is input (the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1)).

If the output frequency when decelerating to stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2-02 for the time set in b2-04.

For deceleration time settings, refer to

page 6-15, Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Run Command

ON OFF

Output

Frequency

Decelerates to stop using the active deceleration time

DC injection brake

DC injection brake time at stop (b2-04)

Fig 6.14 Deceleration to Stop

Coast to Stop

If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output voltage is switched off. The motor coasts to stop.

Run command

ON OFF

Output frequency

Inverter output frequency interrupted

Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop

NOTE

After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time

(L2-03) has elapsed.

DC Braking Stop

After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC injection will be applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2-02. The DC injection brake time depends on the set value of b2-04 and on the output frequency at the moment the stop command is input.If the output frequency was higher than 10% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04) the DC injection time is lengthened like shown in the figure below.

DC injection brake time

Run command

Output frequency

OFF b2-04 x 10

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)

Inverter output voltage interrupted

DC injection brake

DC injection brake time b2-04

10%

Fig 6.16 DC Injection Braking Stop

Output frequency at stop command input

100% (maximum output frequency

NOTE

Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.

Stopping Methods

Coast to Stop with Timer

If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output is switched off so that the motor coasts to stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends on the output frequency when the stop command is input and on the deceleration time.

Run command

Operation wait time T

Deceleration time

(e.g., C1-02)

Output frequency

Inverter output voltage interrupted

Operation wait time T

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)

Minimum output frequency

Fig 6.17 Coast to Stop with Timer

Output frequency at stop command input

100% (Maximum output frequency)

Using the DC Injection Brake

Set parameter b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Applying DC injection at start will stop the motor before starting if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect.

Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.

Set parameter b2-04 to apply a DC injection brake to the motor at stopping. It prevents the motor from coasting when it would not be stopped completely using the normal deceleration. This can occur if the inertia is very high. The DC injection brake can be disabled by setting b2-04 to 0.

Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b2-01 DC injection braking starting frequency b2-02 DC injection braking current b2-03 DC injection braking time at start b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop

Setting

Range

0.0 to

10.0

Factory

Setting

0.5 Hz

0 to

100

0.00

10.00

0.00 to

10.0

50%

0.00 sec.

0.50 sec.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

6-13

6-14

Using an Emergency Stop

Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to H1-05) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to stop using the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, use setting 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, use setting 17.

After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.

Related parameters

Parameter

Number

C1-09 Emergency stop time

Name

Setting

Range

0.0 to

6000.0

Factory

Setting

10.0 sec.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.

Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100% to

0% of (E1-04). The accel./decel. times 1 are used with the factory setting, the accel./decel. times 2 can be selected using a multifunction input.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

C1-01 Acceleration time 1

C1-02 Deceleration time 1

C1-03 Acceleration time 2

C1-04 Deceleration time 2

Name

C1-11 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency

C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start

C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end

Setting

Range

0.0 to

6000.0

Factory

Setting

10.0 sec.

Change during

Operation

Yes

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 Hz

0.00 to

2.50

0.20 sec.

0.00 to

2.50

0.20 sec.

Access

Level

Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal

Commands

Two different acceleration times and deceleration times can be set. When one multi-function input terminal

(H1) is set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1), the acceleration/deceleration time can even be switched during operation by changing the ON/OFF status of this terminal.

The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.

Acceleration/Deceleration Time

Selection 1 Terminal

OFF

Acceleration Time

C1-01

C1-03

Deceleration Time

C1-02

C1-04

Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically

Use this setting when the acceleration/deceleration time should be switched automatically depending on the output frequency.

When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram.

6-15

6-16

Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.

Output frequency

Acceleration/ deceleration time switching frequency

(C1-11)

C1-03 C1-01 C1-02 C1-04

When output frequency

≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using

Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).

When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using

Acceleration/deceleration Time 2 (C1-03, C1-04).

Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency

Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time

By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, shock at start and stop of the machine can be reduced

Two S-curve characteristic times can be set: At acceleration start and at acceleration end. For deceleration start and end the S-curve times are fixed to 0.2 sec.

NOTE

When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:

Accel.Time

C2-01 +

C2-02

+ C1-01/03

Decel. Time = 0.2 sec + C1-02/04

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Setting Example

The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.

Forward

Reverse

Output frequency

Fig 6.19 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching

Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration

(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function)

The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied to the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.

If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85 % of the set value in L3-02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.

If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at a level of 50 % of the inverter rated current. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L3-01 Stall prevention selection during acceleration

Setting

Range

0 to 2

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

L3-02 Stall prevention level during acceleration 0 to 200 120% No A

6-17

6-18

Time Chart

The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.

Output current

Stall level during acceleration

L3-02

85% of

L3-02

Time

Output frequency

*1 *2 *3

*1 The acceleration rate is lowered

*2 The acceleration rate is stopped to reduce the output current

*3 The acceleration is restarted

Time

Fig 6.20 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration

Setting Precautions

•

If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the inverter is operated using the factory settings and the motor stalls, lower the set value of L3-02.

•

If using the motor in the field weakening range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling. It will be reduced to a fixed value of 50 % of the inverter rated current.

•

Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.

Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration

L3-02

50% of inverter rated current

E1-06

Base Frequency (FA)

Output frequency

Fig 6.21 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function

This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid overvoltage tripping.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

E1-01 Input voltage setting

Name

Setting

Range

155 to

255

Factory

Setting

200

VDC

L3-04

Stall prevention selection during deceleration function selection

0 to 2 1

*1. Value for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class inverter the values have to be doubled.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Setting the Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration (L3-04)

There are four different settings selectable for L3-04.

L3-04=0: This setting disables the stall prevention function during deceleration. The motor will be decelerated using the time set in C1-02 (C1-04). If the load inertia is very high and an OV fault occurs during deceleration a braking option has to be used or the deceleration time has to be lengthened.

L3-04=1: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The inverter tries to decelerate within the set deceleration time. It also observes the DC bus voltage. If the DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is held. When the DC bus voltage falls below the stall prevention level the deceleration will be continued.

L3-04=2: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The deceleration time set as C1 is taken as reference. The function automatically tries to optimize the deceleration time by observing the DC bus voltage and shortening the deceleration time. The function does not lengthen the deceleration time, i.e. if C1-

is set too short OV may occur.

Setting Example

An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 is shown below.

Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage

Time

Deceleration time

(set value)

Fig 6.22 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation

6-19

6-20

Setting Precautions

•

The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and input voltage. Refer to the following table for details.

Inverter Rated/Input Voltage

200 V class

E1-01

≥ 400 V

400 V class

E1-01 < 400 V

Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration

380 VDC

760 VDC

660 VDC

•

When using a braking option, be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0.

Adjusting Frequency References

Adjusting Analog Frequency References

The analog reference values can be adjusted using the gain and bias functions for the analog inputs.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

H3-02

H3-03

H3-08

H3-09

H3-10

H3-11

H3-12

Name

Frequency reference terminal A1 input gain

Frequency reference terminal A1 input bias

Multi-function analog A2 signal level selection

Multi-function analog A2 function selection

Multi-function analog A2 input gain

Multi-function analog A2 input bias

Analog input filter time constant

Setting

Range

0.0 to

1000.0

-100.0

to +100.0

0, 2, 3

Factory

Setting

100.0%

0.0%

0 to 16

0.0 to

1000.0

-100.0

to +100.0

0.00 to

2.00

0 or 1

100.0%

0.0%

0.30 sec.

0 H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching

*1. The setting is automatically switched to “B” when the PI controller is enabled

*2. Parameter is moved to Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled.

Change during

Operation

Yes

Access

Level

Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters

The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage or current signals

(analog input A2 only).

The input signal levels can be selected using

•

H3-01 for the analog input A1

•

H3-08 for the analog input A2

Adjustments to the signals can be made using:

•

H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) if analog input A1 is selected to be the frequency reference input

•

H3-10 (Gain) and H3-11 (Bias) if analog input A2 is selected to be the frequency reference input

for adjusting the signal using the gain and bias functions.

Fig 6.23

Frequency reference Frequency reference

Terminal A1 input

Terminal A1 input voltage

0V (4 mA/0 mA)

Terminal A2 input

Fig 6.23 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs

Terminal A2 input voltage (current)

6-21

6-22

Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input

Frequency Bias (Setting: 0)

When parameter H3-09 is set to 0 (Frequency Bias), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage is added to the analog master frequency input at terminal A1 as a bias.

Frequency bias

Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level

0V (4 mA/0 mA)

Fig 6.24 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)

For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).

Frequency reference

H3-02

10 %

Bias

0 V 10 V

Terminal A1 input voltage

Fig 6.25 Example Operation for Frequency Bias via Terminal A2

Frequency Bias 2 (Setting: D)

In contrary to the frequency bias function (H3-09=0) the frequency bias 2 function adds the analog bias value to any master frequency value, either from the analog input, MEMOBUS communication or option boards.

The bias value is not applied to multi-step speed references using the d1 parameters.

Setting Precautions

•

When the PI controller is enabled the function setting for analog input A2 is automatically switched to PI feedback.

•

If the Master Frequency Reference has to be input with a current signal (0/4 to 20 mA) the functionality of analog input A1 and A2 can be exchanged using parameter H3-13.

•

If the analog input A2 is used with a current signal ensure the proper setting of switch S1. Refer to

page 2-

32, Switch S1 - Standard Terminal Board

•

In case a voltage reference signal is noisy a analog input filter time can be adjusted. By default a filter time of 0.3 sec. is set.

Adjusting Frequency References

Jump Frequency Function (Operation Avoiding Resonance)

•

This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output frequency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.

•

It can also be used for deadband control.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number d3-01 Jump frequency 1 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 d3-03 Jump frequency 3

Name

Setting

Range

0.0 to

200.0

Factory

Setting

0.0 Hz

Change during

Operation

No d3-04 Jump frequency width

0.0 to

20.0

1.0 Hz No

The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:

Output frequency

Access

Level

Frequency reference descending

Jump frequency width d3-04

Frequency reference ascending

Jump frequency width d3-04

Jump frequency reference

Jump frequency 3

(d3-03)

Jump frequency 2

(d3-02)

Jump

frequency 1

(d3-01)

Fig 6.26 Jump Frequency

Setting Precautions

•

Set the jump frequencies according to the following formula: d3-01

≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03.

•

When parameters d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.

6-23

6-24

Speed Limit

(Frequency Reference Limit Function)

This section explains how to limit the motor speed.

Limiting Maximum Output Frequency

If the motor should not rotate above a given frequency, use parameter d2-01.

Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit

Setting

Range

0.0 to

110.0

Factory

Setting

100.0%

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Limiting Minimum Frequency

If the motor should not rotate below a given frequency, use parameters d2-02 or d2-03.

There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:

•

Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.

•

Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multistep speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit

Setting

Range

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

Factory

Setting

0.0%

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.0% No A

Frequency Detection

Speed Agreement Function

There are four different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital multifunction outputs M1 to M4 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L4-01 Speed agreement detection level

L4-02 Speed agreement detection width

Setting

Range

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

20.0

Factory

Setting

0.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

•

With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions

(FWD and REV).

Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-02

(M1 – M4 function selection)

The table below shows the necessary H2-01 and H2-02 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement functions.

Set Value

Function

5 f ref

= f out

Agree f out

= f set

Agree

Frequency detection 1

Frequency detection 2

6-25

6-26

Time Charts

The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.

Related parameter f ref

= f out

Agree

L4-01: Speed Agree Level

L4-02: Speed Agree Width

Freq. Ref.

f out

= f set

Agree

L4-02 f ref

= f out

Agree

Output

Frequency

Freq. Ref.

L4-02 f ref

= f out

Agree OFF

(Multi-function output setting = 2) f out

= f set

Agree

(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)

L4-02

L4-01

Output

Frequency

L4-01

L4-02

Frequency

Detection f out

= f ref

Agree 1

ON OFF

(Multi-function output setting = 3)

Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1

(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)

L4-02

L4-01

Output

Frequency

L4-01

L4-02

Freq. Detection 1

ON OFF

(Multi-function output setting = 4)

Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2

(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)

L4-02

L4-01

Output

Frequency

L4-01

L4-02

Freq. Detection 2 OFF ON

(Multi-function output setting = 5)

Improved Operating Performance

This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.

Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed Operation

The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.

The inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. The compensation voltage is calculated as follows:

Motor primary voltage loss

× parameter C4-01.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

C4-01 Torque compensation gain

C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant

Setting

Range

0.00 to

2.50

0 to

10000

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

1.00

200 msec

Yes

Access

Level

Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)

Normally, there is no need to change this setting.

Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances.

•

If the cable is very long, increase the set value.

•

If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set value.

•

If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.

Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.

Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C4-02)

Set the torque compensation function primary delay in milliseconds.

Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Adjust the parameter under the following circumstances:

•

If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.

•

If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.

6-27

6-28

Hunting Prevention Function

The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.

If high response has the priority to vibration suppression this function should be disabled (n1-01 = 0).

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name n1-01 Hunting prevention function selection n1-02 Hunting prevention gain

Setting

Range

0 or 1

0.00 to

2.50

Factory

Setting

1.00

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Adjusting the Hunting Prevention Gain (n1-02)

Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. Adjust the value under the following circumstances:

•

If vibrations occur under light load condition increase the setting.

•

If the motor stalls reduce the setting.

Machine Protection

Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation

Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.

If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).

If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

L3-05

Name

Stall prevention selection during running function selection

L3-06 Stall prevention level during running

Setting

Range

0 to 2

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

30 to 200 120% No A

6-29

6-30

Load Detection

If an excessive load is applied to the machinery (overload) or the load suddenly drops (loss of load), an alarm signal can be output via one of the output terminal M1-M2 or M3-M4.

To use the load detection function, set B or 17 (overload/loss of load detection NO/NC) in one of the parameter H2-01 and H2-02 (terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection).

The load detection level is set as a current level taking the inverter rated output current as 100%.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L6-01 Torque detection selection

L6-02 Torque detection level

L6-03 Torque detection time

Setting

Range

0 to 8

0 to 300

0.0 to

10.0

Factory

Setting

15%

10.0 sec.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Output (H2-01 and H2-02)

Set Value

Function

Load detection NO

(NO contact: Overload or loss of load detected when output is ON)

Load detection NC

(NC contact: Overload or loss of load detected when output is OFF)

Machine Protection

L6-01 Set Value and Digital Operator Display

The relationship between alarms displayed on the Digital Operator when overload or loss of load is detected and the setting in L6-01 is shown in the following table.

Set

Value

Function

Operator

Overload/Undertorque Detection 1

–

Inverter condition

–

Load detection disabled

Overload detection only at speed agree, the operation is continued, a warning is output.

Overload detection continuously during operation, operation continues, a warning is output.

Overload detection only at speed agree, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in fault condition.

Overload detection continuously during operation, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in fault condition.

Loss of load detection only at speed agree, the operation is continued, a warning is output.

Loss of load detection continuously during operation, operation continues, a warning is output.

Loss of load detection only at speed agree, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in fault condition.

Loss of load detection continuously during operation, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in fault condition.

OL3 flashes

OL3 lights up

LL3 flashes

LL3 lights up

Alarm

Fault

Alarm

Fault

Setting Example

The following diagram shows the time chart for overload and loss of load detection.

•

Overload Detection

Motor current (output torque)

* Overload detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.

L6-02

L6-03

Load detection 1 NO

Fig 6.27 Example Operation for Overload Detection

6-31

6-32

•

Loss of Load Detection

Motor current (output torque)

L6-02

* Loss of Load detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.

L6-03

Load Detection NO

Fig 6.28 Example Operation for Loss of Load Detection

Machine Protection

Motor Overload Protection

The motor can be protected from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay function (I²t calculation).

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

E2-01 Motor rated current

Name

Setting

Range

0.32 to

6.40

Factory

Setting

1.90 A

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

L1-01

L1-02

Motor protection selection

Motor protection time constant

0 to 3

0.1 to

5.0

1.0 min

*1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4kW is given.

*2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter Capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value

Function

During motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)

Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01)

Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01. This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.

Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)

Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the application.

Set L1-01 to:

0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.

1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).

2: to enable the thermal motor protection for Inverter motors (forced or externally cooled)

3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (externally cooled).

Application Precautions

•

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 1F the output will stay switched ON as long as the motor is overloaded. When the motor has been stopped to cool down the output will be switched OFF as soon as the Inverter’s I² t calculation falls below 90% of the detection level.

•

The multi-function digital output programmed to 1F will also switch OFF when the Inverter itself is in fault condition. The fault has to be reset manually.

6-33

6-34

Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)

Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.

The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.

The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)

Operating time (min.)

Cold start

Hot start

Motor current (%)

(E2-01 is set to 100%)

Fig 6.29 Motor Protection Operation Time

Setting Precautions

•

If multiple motors are connected to one inverter, set parameter L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect each of the motors, use a control circuit that switches off the inverter output when one of the motors overheats.

•

With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 (enabled), because the internally calculated thermal value will be reset after inverter power supply switch off.

•

For safe overload tripping, set the value in parameter L1-02 to a low setting.

•

When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f

1/4

(frequency). Consequently, a low output frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even when the output current is below the rated current. If the motor is operated at the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor which is externally cooled.

Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

To enable the Motor overload pre-alarm enable the motor overload protection function (i.e., L1-01 must be set to 1) and set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to 1F

(motor overload OL1 pre-alarm). If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.

Application Precautions

With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 to 3, because the thermal value will be reset.

Machine Protection

Motor Overheat Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs

This function provides a motor overheating protection using a thermistor (PTC characteristic – Positive Temperature Coefficient) that is built into the windings of each motor phase.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L1-03 Alarm operation selection during motor overheating

Setting

Range

0 to 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

L1-04 Motor overheating operation selection

L1-05 Motor temperature input filter time constant

0 to 2 1

0.00 to

10.00

0.20 sec.

PTC Thermistor Characteristics

The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.

The shown resistance value is for one motor phase. Normally the 3 resistors (1 for each phase) are connected in series

Class F Class H

Resistance (Ohms)

Tr: Temperature threshold value

Temperature

Fig 6.30 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics

6-35

6-36

Operation during Motor Overheating

The operation when the motor overheats can be selected using the parameters L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter time parameter in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital Operator.

Fault Codes If the Motor Overheats

Fault Code

OH3

OH4

Details

Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.

Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04. The fault relay is activated

By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input) the motor temperature can be detected and OH3 respectively OH4 can be output if the motor overheats.

The terminal connections that are to be used are shown in

Fig 6.31

Inverter

Multi-function digital input

Multi-function digital output

Branch resistance

18 k

Ω *1

Fault relay output

PTC thermistor

* 1. The resistance value of 18 k

Ω is only valid when a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic

shown on the previous page is used.

Fig 6.31 Terminal Connections for Motor Overheating Protection

Setting Precautions

Because this function uses a voltage signal to terminal A2, pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal board has to be turned to OFF for A2 voltage input. The factory setting is ON (A2 current input). Refer to

Chapter 2, Switch S1 - Standard Terminal Board

For the same reason the parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V input).

Machine Protection

Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation

If the motor reverse rotation is prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted, even if it is input. Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)

It is also possible to change the output phase order by changing b1-04 to 2 or 3. This much easier and faster than changing the wiring if the motor rotational direction is wrong.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation

Setting

Range

0 to 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Settings

•

Setting 0: Both operation directions are enabled for the Inverter.

•

Setting 1: Reverse operation is not enabled, a reverse RUN command is disregarded.

•

Setting 2: Both operation directions are enabled, two output phases are exchanged

•

Setting 3: Reverse operation is not enabled, a reverse RUN command is disregarded. Additional two output phases are exchanged.

6-37

6-38

Automatic Restart

This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a momentary power loss.

Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss

After a momentary power loss, the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.

To restart the Inverter after power is recovered, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.

If L2-01 is set to 1, the inverter will restart, when power is recovered within the time set in L2-02. If the power loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an UV1 fault (DC bus undervoltage) will be detected.

If L2-01 is set to 2, the inverter will restart, when the main power supply is recovered as long as the control power supply (i.e., power supply to the control circuit) is maintained. Consequently, alarm UV1 (DC bus undervoltage) will not be detected. Nevertheless, UV alarm is displayed.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L2-01 Momentary power loss detection

L2-02

L2-03

L2-04

L2-05

Momentary power loss ridethru time

Min. baseblock (BB) time

Voltage recovery time

Undervoltage (UV) detection level

Setting

Range

0 to 2

0 to 25.5

0.1 to 5.0

0.0 to

5.0

150 to

210

Factory

Setting

0.1 sec.

0.3 sec.

190 VDC

Change during

Operation

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4kW is given.

*2. Values for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class Inverter the values have to be doubled.

Access

Level

Setting Precautions

•

Fault output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.

•

To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, ensure that the RUN command stays ON during the power loss

•

L2-04 sets an acceleration time for the output voltage (from 0 V to normal voltage). After the power supply has returned the output voltage will be increased to the set value using the time set in L2-04.

•

L2-05 sets the level at which UV is detected.

Automatic Restart

Speed Search

The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting and then starts smoothly from that speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to 1 or 2.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting b3-01

Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation)

0 to 3 2 b3-02 b3-03 b3-05

Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation) b3-14 Bi-directional speed search selection

L2-03 Min. baseblock time

L2-04

Speed search operating current (current detection)

Speed search deceleration time (current detection)

Voltage recovery time

0 to

200

0.1 to

10.0

120%

2.0 sec.

0.0 to

20.0

0.0 to

5.0

0.2 sec.

0 or 1 1

0.1 to 5.0

0.1 sec.

0.3 sec.

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4kW is given.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Inputs

Set Value

Function

External speed search command 1

OFF: Speed search disabled (Acceleration starts from FMIN)

ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed and starts search from the calculated speed)

Current detection (Starts speed search from maximum output frequency)

External speed search command 2

OFF: Speed search disabled (Acceleration starts from FMIN)

ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed and starts search from the calculated speed)

(Same operation as external speed search command 1)

Current detection: Starts speed search from set frequency

(reference frequency when speed search command was input).

External speed search command 3

OFF: Inverter is base blocked

ON: Inverter starts operation using speed search (same operation as speed search 2)

6-39

6-40

Setting Precautions

•

When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function digital terminals, an OPE03 alarm will occur.

•

If performing speed search using external search commands ensure that the RUN command and the external search command remain both ON.

•

If the Inverter output is equipped with a contactor, set the contactor operation delay time in the Speed

Search Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 sec. If no contactor is used the setting can be reduced to 0 sec.

•

Parameter b3-02 (current detection level for search completion) is effective only when current detection speed search is selected. When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is supposed to be completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency.

•

Parameter b3-03 sets the time the output frequency is reduced during speed search until the actual motor speed is detected.

•

If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-

03).

•

If speed search is only desired in the last known operation direction set b3-14 to 1.

Application Precautions for Speed Calculation Speed Search

•

Always perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on calculated speeds.

•

If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance again.

Speed Search Selection

The speed search method can be selected using b3-01. If b3-01 is set to 0 the search method is speed calculation. It has to be activated by a multi-function input (H1 set to 61 or 62).

If b3-01 is set to 1, the search method is speed calculation too, but speed search is performed at every RUN command and has not to be activated by a multifunction input.

The same is valid for setting b3-01 to 2 or 3, only the search method is current detection and not speed calculation.

Search Name

Search Method

External Speed Search

Command

Application

Precautions

Speed Calculation

Calculates the motor speed at speed search start and accelerates or decelerates from the calculated speed to the set frequency. The direction of motor rotation is also detected.

With external speed search command 1and 2 the speed calculation is performed and the speed search started from the calculated speed.

Current Detection

Starts speed search from the last known frequency or the maximum output frequency. The output frequency is decreased until the output current falls below the speed search operating current.

External speed search command 1:

Starts speed search from the maximum output frequency.

External speed search command 2:

Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.

Cannot be used with multi-motor drives or with motors two or more sizes smaller than the

Inverter capacity.

The motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads.

Automatic Restart

Examples for Speed Calculation

Search at Startup

The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown below.

Run command

OFF

Deceleration time set in b3-03

Set frequency reference

Starts using calculated speed

Output frequency b3-02

Output current

0.7 to 1.0 s * Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*

Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short

time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.

Fig 6.32 Speed Search at Startup (Calculated Speed)

Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)

1. Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)

AC power supply

Output frequency

OFF

Start using speed detected

Set frequency reference

Output current

10 ms

*1. After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for

the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1

Fig 6.33 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)

6-41

6-42

2. Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)

AC power supply

Output frequency

OFF Start using speed detected

Set frequency reference

Output current

10 ms

Minimum baseblock time

(L2-03)

Speed Search Wait Time

(b3-05)

Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,

operation may be the same as the search in case 1.

Fig 6.34 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)

Examples for Current Detection

Speed Search at Startup

The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.

Run command

OFF

Maximum output frequency or set frequency

Output frequency

Deceleration time set in b3-03

Set frequency reference b3-02

Output current

Minimum baseblock time*

(L2-03)

* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).

Fig 6.35 Speed Search at Startup (Current Detection)

Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)

1. Loss time shorter than minimum baseblock time

AC power supply

Output frequency

OFF

Output frequency before power loss

Deceleration time set in b3-03

Set frequency reference b3-02 speed search operating current

Output current

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)*1

*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output

frequency immediately before baseblock.

*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for

the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).

Fig 6.36 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)

Automatic Restart

2. Loss time longer than minimum baseblock time

AC power supply

OFF

Output frequency before power loss

Deceleration speed set in b3-03

Set frequency reference

Output frequency b3-02

Speed search operating time

Output current

Speed search wait time (b3-05)

Minimum baseblock time*

(L2-03)

Fig 6.37 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)

6-43

6-44

Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is

Lost

The frequency reference loss detection function can be used to continue operation at reduced speed using the set value in parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value. When using an analog input as frequency reference source, a frequency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops more than 90% in 400 msec or less.

When parameter L4-05 is set to 1 the Inverter will continue operation at the percentage in L4-06 of the last active frequency reference.

An fault signal during frequency reference loss can be output if H2-01 or H2-02 (Terminal M1-M2/M3-M4 function selection) to C (Loss of frequency reference).

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing

L4-06

Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

0 to 100% 80%

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value

C Loss of frequency reference

Function

Automatic Restart

Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)

If an Inverter fault occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no fault is detected, the

Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts

L5-02 Auto restart operation selection

L5-03 Fault Retry Time

Setting

Range

0 to 10

0 or 1

0.5 to

180.0

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

10.0 s No

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value

1E Automatic restart enabled

Function

Application Precautions

•

The auto restart function can be applied to the following faults.

• OC (Overcurrent)

• GF (Ground fault)

• PUF (DC bus fuse blown)

• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)

• UV1 (DC Bus Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)

• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)

• OL1 (Motor overload)

• OL2 (Inverter overload)

• OH1 (Motor overheat)

• OL3 (Overload)

*1. When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)

If an fault that is not listed above occurs the Inverter will not restart automatically and remain in fault condition.

•

If the fault output should be operated during auto restart L5-02 has to be set to 1

•

The number of auto restarts is set in parameter L5-01. If a fault occurs the inverter performs the auto restart corresponding to

Fig 6.38

. The inverter tries to restart every 5 msec for the maximum time of L5-03. All retries performed during L5-03 are regarded as one restart attempt.

The internal counting of restart attempts is reset to 0 when the drive has run 10 minutes without fault.

6-45

6-46

Fault Occurrance

Fault Output

RUN Controller

Retry Function

Controller Base Block

Controller delay

5 msec

L2-03 L5-03 (max)

Total Base Block Time

Fig 6.38 Timing Chart for Auto Restart Function

Application Precautions

The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:

•

After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.

•

After the protection operation has been performed and an fault reset has been input.

•

After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.

Inverter Protection

Inverter Overheat Protection

The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

Setting

Range

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 50 to 130

L8-03 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection 0 to 4

L8-19 Frequency reference during OH pre-alarm

0.0 to

20.0%

Factory

Setting

°C

20.0%

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value

Function

Inverter overheat pre-alarm (ON when overheat pre-alarm is active)

When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.

To prevent a sudden and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an overtemperature, an overheating pre-alarm can be output. Parameter L8-02 selects the pre-alarm temperature level, parameter L8-03 selects the inverter reaction on the pre-alarm:

•

Setting 0: The Inverter decelerates to stop using deceleration time C1-02, OH fault is output.

•

Setting 1: The Inverter coasts to stop, OH fault is output.

•

Setting 2: The Inverter decelerates to stop using the emergency stop time C1-09, OH fault is output.

•

Setting 3: The Inverter will continue operation and only display an OH alarm on the operator display.

•

Setting 4: The Inverter will continue operation but reduce the output frequency order to reduce the load.

Parameter L8-19 defines the decrease in output frequency as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1-04. An OH alarm is output.

6-47

6-48

Input Phase Loss Detection Level

For the Input Phase Loss Detection the drive monitors the DC bus ripple. The drive integrates this

ΔV value over 10 scans (appr. 10 seconds). If the integrated

ΔV value of any consecutive ten scan range is greater than the voltage determined by multiplying L8-06 times the drives rated OV Trip point (400 VDC/800 VDC), a PF fault will occur and the Drive will coast to stop.

Phase Loss Fault

Signal

DC Bus

Voltage

10 seconds t

L8-06

Fig 6.39 Input Phase Loss Detection

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

L8-06

Name

Input Phase Loss Detection Level

Setting

Range

0.0 to

25.0%

Factory

Setting

5.0%

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Ground Fault Protection

The ground fault protection function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally this sum should be 0. If the sum exceeds 50% of the Inverter rated current a GF fault is detected and the motor coasts to stop.

The ground fault protection can be disabled by setting L8-09 to 0. It is not recommended to disable the ground fault protection.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L8-09 Ground fault protection selection

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Inverter Protection

Cooling Fan Control

This function controls the fan that is mounted to the inverters heatsink.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L8-10 Cooling fan control selection

L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time

L8-32 OH1 detection selection for fan failure

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

0 to 300 300 sec.

0 or 1 1

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Relay Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value

Function

Cooling fan fault (ON: internal cooling fan fault)

Selecting the Cooling Fan Control

Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:

0:The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting.

1:The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.

If L8-10 is set to 0, the turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After switching OFF the

RUN command the inverter waits for this time before the cooling fan is switched. The factory setting is 300 sec.

Parameter L8-32 selects whether failure of the internal cooling fan will lead to an OH1 fault or not. The factory setting is 0. This disables the OH1 fault in case of fan failure and displays a FAN alarm instead. Setting 1 activates the OH1 fault also in case of a internal fan failure.

Application Precautions

When L8-32 is set to 0 and the internal fan fails the Inverter’s overload capability is automatically derated by

10%. The overload time at 100% of the Inverter rated current becomes 30 seconds and the overload time at

120% becomes 10 seconds.

IMPORTANT

If using L8-32 = 0 a multi-function output should be set to 10 (Alarm) or 3D (Cooling Fan Error) to indicate to peripheral equipment that the Inverter’s internal cooling fan has failed. Under this condition the

Inverter should be immediately stopped and serviced for fan replacement. If the Inverter continues to run in this state, its internal temperature will increase, resulting in a potential decrease of lifetime.

Setting the Ambient Temperature

The overload capability of the inverter depends on the ambient temperature. At ambient temperatures higher than 45°C (40°C for Inverters in protection class IP20 / NEMA1) the output current capacity is reduced, i.e.

the OL2 alarm level will be lowered. Refer to

Fig 6.40

for the output current derating.

6-49

6-50

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

L8-12 Ambient temperature

Name

The ambient temperature must be set in parameter L8-12.

Setting

Range

45 to 60

Factory

Setting

45 °C

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

100

IP00

IP20

10 20 30

Temperature (°C)

40 50

Fig 6.40 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve

OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed

At output frequencies below 6 Hz the overload capability of the inverter is lower than at higher speeds, i.e. an

OL2 fault (inverter overload) may occur even if the current is below the normal OL2 current level (see

Fig

6.41

The special OL2 characteristics can be disabled by setting parameter L8-15 to 0. Generally is not recommended to disable that function as the Inverter lifetime might be shortened.

OL2 Detection Level

120% for 1 min.

60% for 1 min.

-6 Hz 0 Hz 6 Hz

Fig 6.41 OL2 Alarm Level at Low Frequencies

Output

Speed

Inverter Protection

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Soft CLA Selection

Soft CLA (software current level A) is a current detection level for the output IGBT protection. It is only active during acceleration and lowers the output voltage quickly to reduce the current in order to protect the

IGBTs.

The Soft CLA function can be disabled by setting parameter L8-18 to 0. Generally it is absolutely not recommended to disable this function.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

L8-18 Soft CLA selection

Name

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

6-51

6-52

Input Terminal Functions

Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals

The Inverter’s run command and frequency reference inputs can be switched between local (i.e., Digital Operator) and remote (input method set in b1-01 and b1-02).

If any parameter from H1-01 to H1-05 (terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selection), this input can be used to switch over between local and remote operation.

To set the frequency reference source and RUN command source to control circuit terminals, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-01 Reference selection b1-02 RUN command source selection

Setting

Range

0 to 3

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator; OFF: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)

NOTE

Local/remote switching can also be performed using the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator. When the local/remote selection has been set for one external terminal, the LOCAL/REMOTE key function on the Digital Operator will be disabled.

Input Terminal Functions

Blocking the Inverter Output (Baseblock Command)

Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform baseblock commands and thereby to block the inverter output.

Clear the baseblock command to restart the operation using the speed search method set in b3-01 (speed search selection). Otherwise the Inverter may trip as it will start at the same frequency reference again.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

External baseblock NO (ON: Inverter is baseblocked)

External baseblock NC (OFF: Inverter is baseblocked)

Time Chart

The time chart when using a baseblock command is shown below.

Forward operation/Stop

Baseblock command

Frequency reference

Input

Cleared

Speed search

Output frequency

Coast to a stop

Fig 6.42 Baseblock Commands

IMPORTANT

When a contactor between inverter and motor is used, always perform a base block command before opening the contactor.

Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable

If a digital input is programmed to setting C the analog input A2 can be enabled or disabled by switching the digital input.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Multi-function analog input A2 enable (ON: A2 is enabled)

6-53

6-54

Drive Enable/Disable

If a digital input is programmed to setting 6A the Inverter can be enabled or disabled by switching the digital input

If the input is switched OFF while a RUN command is active the inverter will stop using the stopping method set in b1-03.

The Drive Enable/Disable signal has to be ON before the RUN command is activated.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

6A Drive enable (ON: Inverter enabled)

Function

Bypass Drive Enable

If a digital input is programmed to setting 70 the Inverter will not execute a RUN command until this input is closed.

Unlike the setting 6A (Drive Enable/Disable) the RUN command does not need to be cycled after closing the input. The Inverter will start whenever the digital input is closed a RUN command is active with the activated acceleration time.

If a RUN command is active and the Bypass Drive Enable input is OFF the digital operator shows the alarm message “dnE”.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Bypass Drive enable (ON: Inverter is enabled)

Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration

Ramp Hold)

•

If a digital input is programmed to setting A the Inverter will pause the acceleration or deceleration and hold the output frequency when the input is closed.

•

Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the input is turned OFF.

•

The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is ON.

•

When parameter d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selection) is set to 1, the held frequency will be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained as frequency reference even after a power loss and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name d4-01 Frequency reference hold function selection

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

A Accel./Decel. Ramp Hold

Function

Input Terminal Functions

Time Chart

The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.

Power supply

OFF

Forward/Stop OFF ON OFF ON

OFF ON OFF ON

Acceleration/Deceleration

Ramp Hold

Frequency reference

Output frequency

Hold Hold

Fig 6.43 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold

Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Digital Input Signals

(UP/DOWN)

The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction digital input terminal S3 to S7.

To use this function, set two of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command).

The table below shows the possible combinations of the UP and DOWN command and the corresponding operation.

Hold Operation

UP command

DOWN command

Acceleration Deceleration

ON OFF

OFF ON

OFF

The change of the output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration times. Be sure to set b1-02

(Run command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit d4-01 Frequency reference hold function selection

Setting

Range

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

0.0 to

110.0

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

100.0%

Change during

Operation

0.0%

Access

Level

6-55

6-56

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

UP command

DOWN command

Function

Setting Precautions

An OPE03 alarm will occur if one of the following settings are programmed:

•

Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.

•

UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been programmed to digital inputs at the same time.

Application Precautions

•

When the frequency reference is input by UP/DOWN commands the frequency is limited by the parameters d2-01 to d2-03 (Reference Limits, set in% of the maximum output frequency).

•

When the frequency reference is input by UP/DOWN commands the analog input A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit is set in either parameter d2-02 or d2-03, the larger limit value will become the frequency reference lower limit.

•

If a frequency reference lower limit is set and the RUN command is activated the drive accelerates to the lower limit.

•

Multi-step operation is disabled when UP/DOWN commands are used.

•

When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the last frequency reference value is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command before the power is switched on.

Input Terminal Functions

Connection Example and Time Chart

The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function Digital Input terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.

Parameter

H1-01

H1-02

Name

Multi-function input (terminal S3)

Multi-function input (terminal S4)

Set Value

0 to 10 V analog signal

Inverter

Forward operation/Stop

Reverse operation/Stop

UP command

DOWN command

Digital input neutral

Frequency reference lower limit

Fig 6.44 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated

Output frequency

Upper limit

Accelerates to lower limit

Lower limit

Same frequency

Forward operation/stop

UP command

DOWN command

Reference frequency reset

Speed agree*

Power supply

* The speed agree signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/

decelerating while the RUN command is ON.

Fig 6.45 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart

6-57

6-58

Trim Control Function

The trim control function increments or decrements the frequency reference from analog input by the value set in parameter d4-02 (Trim control level, set in% of maximum output frequency) using two digital inputs.

To use this function, set two of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input S3 to S7 function selection) to 1C

(Trim Control Increase) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease).

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number d4-02 Trim control level

Name

Setting

Range

0 to 100

Factory

Setting

10%

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Trim Control Increase

Trim Control Decrease

Function

Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference

The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown below.

Frequency Reference

Trim Control Increase

Trim Control Decrease

Set Frequency

Reference

+ d4-02

OFF

Set Frequency

Reference

- d4-02

OFF

HOLD

OFF

Setting Precautions

An OPE03 alarm will occur if only one of the trim control commands is programmed.

Application Precautions

•

Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference source is one of the analog input (A1 or A2).

•

When the (analog frequency reference value - d4-02) < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.

Input Terminal Functions

Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold

If one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E (analog frequency reference sample/hold) the analog frequency reference will be sampled and held whenever the digital input remains ON for at least 100 miliseconds.

The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.

Sample/hold command

Analog input

Frequency reference

Fig 6.46 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency

Related Parameters

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Analog frequency reference sample/hold (ON: Frequency reference sample/hold)

Setting Precautions

An OPE03 alarm will occur if the following functions are programmed to digital inputs additional to the analog frequency reference sample/hold function:

•

Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold (setting A)

•

UP/DOWN (settings 10/11)

•

Trim Control Increase/Decrease (settings 1C/1D)

Application Precautions

•

When performing analog frequency reference sample/hold of, be sure to close the digital input for 100 msec or more. If the input is ON for less than 100 msec it will be ignored.

•

The frequency reference value that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.

6-59

6-60

Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card

The source of frequency reference and RUN command can be switched between a Communication option card and the sources selected in b1-01 and b1-02. Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input S3 to S7 function selection) to 2 or 36 to enable operation source switchover.

If a RUN command is active, the switchover will not be accepted.

Related Parameters

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Operation Source Option Card/Inverter selection (ON: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)

Operation Source Option/Inverter selection 2 (ON: option card)

Setting Precautions

To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:

•

Set b1-01 (frequency reference source) to a value different from 3 (option card).

•

Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 3 (option card).

•

Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 to 2 or 36.

Setting for one of

H1-01 to H1-05

Terminal

Status

Frequency Reference and Run Command Source

OFF

Communication option card

(Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option card)

Inverter

(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)

Inverter

(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)

Communication option card

(Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option card)

Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS communication

The frequency reference and RUN command source can be switched between the MEMOBUS communication via RS-422/485 and the inverter settings in b1-01 and b1-02. Therefore set one of the parameters H1-01 to

H1-05 (digital inputs terminals S3 to S7 function selection) to 6B or 6C.

If a RUN command is active the switchover will not be accepted.

Related Parameters

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Operation source communication/Inverter selection (ON: RS-422/485 port active)

Operation source communication/Inverter selection 2 (ON: inverter settings active)

Input Terminal Functions

Setting precautions

To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:

•

Set b1-01 (Frequency reference source) to a value different from 2 (Memobus)

•

Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 2 (Memobus)

•

Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 to 6B or 6C

Setting for one of

H1-01 to H1-05

Terminal

Status

OFF

Frequency Reference and Run Command Source

Inverter

(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)

MEMOBUS communication

(Frequency reference and run command are input via Memobus, RS-422/485 port)

MEMOBUS communication

(Frequency reference and run command are input via Memobus, RS-422/485 port)

Inverter

(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)

AUTO/HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input

If the HOA Digital Operator (optional available) is connected the Inverter can be switched to AUTO or

HAND mode with digital inputs.

If b1-13 (HAND/AUTO switching during run selection) is set to 1 this is also possible during run, otherwise the Inverter has to be stopped to enable the switchover. Depending on the setting of b1-13 the functionality of b1-12 (HAND frequency reference source selection) changes.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-12 HAND frequency reference source selection b1-13 HAND/AUTO switching during run selection

Setting

Range

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

AUTO mode selection (ON: AUTO mode active)

HAND mode selection (ON: HAND mode active)

Application Precautions

Following table shows the behavior of the Inverter depending on the setting of b1-12 and b1-13.

Setting of b1-12

Setting of b1-13

(Disabled)

HAND/AUTO Switching Behaviour

(Operator)

(Terminals)

(Enabled)

(Disabled)

(Enabled)

Inverter has to be stopped for HAND/AUTO switchover.

If started in HAND mode d1-01 becomes the active frequency reference.

Inverter can be switched over during run.

When switched to HAND mode the last AUTO frequency reference is used in

HAND mode and copied into d1-01.

Inverter has to be stopped for HAND/AUTO switchover.

If started in HAND mode the AUTO frequency reference is used.

Inverter can be switched over during run.

When switched to HAND mode d1-01 becomes the active frequency reference.

6-61

6-62

Setting Precautions

•

The status of the digital inputs programmed to AUTO mode selection or HAND mode selection will override any digital operator selections.

•

If a Digital Operator different from the HOA Digital Operator is connected to the Inverter the digital inputs

AUTO mode selection and HAND mode selection will be ignored.

•

An OPE3 alarm will occur when AUTO mode selection and HAND mode selection are assigned to 2 digital inputs simultaneously.

Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands

(FJOG/RJOG)

The FJOG/RJOG function operates the inverter at the jog frequency. This function includes a RUN command, it does not need to be set additionally.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number d1-17 Jog frequency reference

Name

Setting

Range

0 to

200.00

Factory

Setting

6.00 Hz

Change during

Operation

Yes

Access

Level

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)

RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)

Application Precautions

•

Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands will override any other frequency references.

•

When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the

Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).

Input Terminal Functions

Stopping the Inverter on External Faults (External Fault Function)

Set

Value

The external fault function can activate the fault relay output and can stop the Inverter operation by a digital input. The Digital Operator will display EFx where x is the number of the digital input the fault signal is connected to.

To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).

Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.

•

Signal logic from peripheral devices

•

External fault detection method

•

Operation during external fault detection

The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-01 to H1-05.

Signal Logic

Contact

Yes

Fault Detection Method

Continuous

Detection

During

Operation

Yes

Operation During Fault Detection

Decelerate to Stop

(Fault)

Coast to

Stop

(Fault)

Fast Stop

(Fault)

Continue

Operation

(Warning)

Yes

6-63

6-64

Output Terminal Functions

The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 and H2-02 parameters (terminal M1 to M4 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name

H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection

Setting

Range

0 to 3D

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection 0 to 3D 1 No A

During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

During Run (Setting: 0)

OFF

The RUN command is OFF, the Inverter output is OFF

The RUN command is ON, the Inverter output is giving out a voltage.

During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

OFF

The Inverter does not give out a frequency. (During baseblock, DC injection or stopped)

The Inverter gives out a frequency.

These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter’s operating status.

Run command

Baseblock command

Output frequency

OFF

During run 1 output

During run 2 output

OFF ON

OFF

Fig 6.47 Timing Chart for During Run and During Run 2 Output

Output Terminal Functions

Zero Speed (Setting: 1)

OFF

The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (DC injection braking start level, b2-01).

The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (DC injection braking start level, b2-01).

Output frequency

Zero speed level (b2-01)

Zero-speed output

OFF ON

Fig 6.48 Timing Chart for Zero-speed

Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 6 the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of the Inverter at startup has finished without any faults.

During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 7 the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus undervoltage is detected.

During Baseblock (Setting: 8)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 8 the output is switched ON as long as the Inverter output is base blocked.

Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 9 the output is ON when the Digital Operator is selected as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.

Run Command Source Selection Status (Setting: A)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to A the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.

Fault (Setting: E)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to E the output is switched ON when any fault different from

CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched in alarm condition. (Refer to

page 7-8, Alarm Detection

for fault and alarm lists.)

Minor Fault (Alarm) (Setting: 10)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 10 the output is switched ON when the Inverter is in alarm

condition (refer to

pp.).

6-65

6-66

Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)

If a multi-function digital output is set to 11 the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs.

Reverse Direction (Setting: 1A)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever the motor is rotating in reverse direction.

OH Pre-Alarm (Setting: 20)

The overheat fault function (OH) is designed to protect the Inverter from excessive temperature damage. Thermistors attached to the heatsink of the Inverter monitor the temperature and will make the Inverter trip if the temperature reaches 105 °C.

An OH pre-alarm digital output will be switched ON whenever the heatsink temperature reaches the level specified by parameter L8-02 (Overheat pre-alarm level). Parameter L8-03 (Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm) will determine the Inverter’s response to reaching the OH pre-alarm level (besides switching the configured digital output).

Drive Enabled (Setting: 38)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 38 the output is switched ON when the Inverter is enabled.

The Inverter can be enabled or disabled using a digital multifunction input (see also

page 6-54

Drive Waiting (Setting: 39)

The digital output will close during the time-out period between the input of a RUN command and the expiring of the delay time specified by b1-11.

During oH and Reduced Frequency (Setting: 3A)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 3A the output is switched ON when an Inverter overheat alarm has occurred and the motor is running at reduced speed according to parameter L8-19 (Frequency reference during OH pre-alarm). See also

page 6-47

RUN Command from Option Card/Communication Option (Setting: 3B)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 3B the output will be switched ON when the RUN command is input from the built-in communication (Memobus, N2) OR from a communication option card (SI-S1,

SI-N1, etc.). If both RUN commands are off the output will be switched OFF.

Cooling Fan Fault (Setting: 3D)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 3D the output will be swathed ON when the internal cooling fan is faulty. Whenever this output is switched ON the Inverter should be immediately stopped and serviced for internal fan replacement. If the Inverter continues to run in this state, its internal temperature will increase, resulting in a potential decrease of lifetime.

Monitor Parameters

This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor parameters.

Using the Analog Monitor Parameters

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

H4-02

H4-03

H4-04

H4-05

H4-06

H4-07

H4-08

Terminal FM gain

Terminal FM bias

Terminal AM gain

Terminal AM bias

Name

H4-01 Terminal FM monitor selection

Terminal AM monitor selection

Terminal FM signal level selection

Terminal AM signal level selection

Setting

Range

1 to 38

0 ~

1000.0%

-110.0 ~

+110.0%

1 to 53

0 ~

1000.0%

-110.0 ~

+110.0%

0 or 2

Factory

Setting

100%

0.0%

50%

0.0%

Change during

Operation

Yes

*1. An analog output signal of 4-20 mA (setting 2) requires an optional terminal board (ETC618121) for current output.

Access

Level

Selecting Analog Monitor Items

Some of the Digital Operator monitor items (U1 [status monitors]) can be output at the multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to

page 5-41, Monitor Parameters: U

, and set the parameter number of U1 group ( part of U1) for the parameters H4-01 respectively H4-04.

Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items

Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06.

The gain sets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 100% of the monitor item.

The bias sets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 0% of the monitor item.

Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V. A voltage higher than this value can not be output.

Selecting the Signal Level

Select the signal level for the analog outputs using parameters H4-07 and H4-08. The default setting is 0 to

10V. If a current output signal of 4 to 20mA should be used an optional terminal board (ETC618121) with additional analog current outputs is required.

6-67

6-68

Adjusting the Meter

The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog outputs is shown on three examples in

Fig 6.49

Output Voltage

Gain: 170%

Bias: 30%

10V

Gain: 100%

Bias: 0%

Gain: 0%

Bias: 100%

100%

Monitor Item

(e.g. Output Frequency)

Fig 6.49 Monitor Output Adjustment

Individual Functions

Using MEMOBUS Communications

The Varispeed E7 is equipped with a RS422/485 serial communication port using the MEMOBUS protocol

MEMOBUS Communication Configuration

MEMOBUS enables a master device (e.g. PLC) to communicate with up to 31 slave devices (e.g. Inverters).

Basically the slaves respond on messages sent from the master.

The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. Consequently, to every slave a address must be assigned.

PLC

Inverter Inverter Inverter

Fig 6.50 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter

Communications Specifications

The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.

Item

Interface

Communications Cycle

Communications Parameters

Communications Protocol

Number of Connectable Units

Specifications

RS422, RS485

Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)

Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 and 19,200 bps.

Data length:

Parity:

Stop bits:

MEMOBUS

31 units max.

8 bits fixed

Select from even, odd or none.

1 bit selected

6-69

6-70

Communications Connection Terminal

The MEMOBUS communication uses the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Enable the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter (seen from the PLC) only.

RS-422A or

RS-485

Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)

Fig 6.51 Communications Connection Terminal

Terminating resistance

IMPORTANT

• Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.

• Use shielded cables for the communications cables and use proper shielding clamps

• When using RS485 communication is used, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.

See

Fig 6.52

below.

Fig 6.52 Connections when RS485 Communication is used

Procedure for Communicating with the PLC

Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.

1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.

2. Turn ON the power supply.

3. Set the required communications parameters (H5-01 to H5-08) using the Digital Operator.

4. Turn OFF the power supply and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.

5. Turn ON the power supply once again.

6. Perform communications with the PLC.

IMPORTANT

It is absolutely necessary to cycle the input power once when any of the serial communication parameters (H5-01 to H5-09) has been changed.

Individual Functions

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-01 Reference source selection b1-02 RUN command Source Selection

H5-01 Station address

H5-02 Baud rate selection

H5-03 Communications parity selection

H5-04 Communications error detection selection

H5-05 Communications error detection selection

H5-06 Send wait time

H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF

H5-08 Communication Selection

H5-09 CE detection time

Setting

Range

0 to 3

0 to 20

0 to 4

0 to 2

0 to 3

0 or 1

5 to 65 msec

0 or 1

0.0 to

10.0 sec.

Factory

Setting

5 msec

2.0 sec.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

*1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communication

MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.

•

Monitoring operation status of the inverter

•

Setting and reading parameters

•

Resetting faults

•

Inputting digital input commands. (an OR operation is performed between the commands from MEMO-

BUS communication and the signals input from multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7.)

Setting RUN Command and Frequency Reference by MEMOBUS

If the RUN command or the frequency reference should be input directly by MEMOBUS communication parameter b1-01 respectively b1-02 have to be set to 3 (Serial communication)

MEMOBUS Communication settings

•

Parameter H5-02 selects the communication speed. Following speeds are possible: 1200 bps (setting 0),

2400 bps (setting 1), 4800 bps (setting 2), 9600 bps (setting 3, default) and 19200 bps (setting 4).

•

Parameter H5-03 selects the used parity between no parity (setting 0, default), even parity (setting 1) and odd parity (setting 2).

•

Parameter H5-04 selects the Inverter’s behaviour when a communication error (CE) has occurred and

H5-05 is set 1. Following settings are possible:

0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time c1-02, CE fault.

1: Coast to stop, CE fault.

2: Emergency stop using the emergency stop time c1-09, CE fault.

3: Continue operation, CE alarm is displayed.

Parameter H5-05 selects whether communication error (CE) is detected or not. The default setting is 1, a time out from the master is detected after not receiving any message for the time set in H5-09.

•

Parameter H5-06 specifies the delay time the Inverter waits until it sends the response on the received message from the master.

•

Parameter H5-07 configures whether the Inverter will implement RTS (Request To Send) messaging all the time (H5-07=0) or only when sending (H5-07=1). It is recommended to set H5-07 to 0 when using

RS485 and to 1 when using RS422.

6-71

6-72

•

Beside MEMOBUS the drive is also capable of using Metasys N2 communications via the RS485/422 port. Setting parameter H5-08 to 0 activates MEMOBUS communication, setting 1 enables Metasys N2.

Note: A additional manual for the Metasys N2 protocol is available on request.

•

The setting of parameter H5-09 determines the length of time that serial communications must be lost before a CE fault occurs.

Setting Precautions

•

If the Inverter trips with CE faults with a communication speed setting of 19200 bps, lower the communication speed.

•

If the Inverter trips with CE faults with lower communication speed selections lengthen the send wait time in parameter H5-06

•

If the Inverter’s station address is set to 0 it will ignore all messages from the master.

Message Format

In MEMOBUS communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets depends on the command (function) content.

Slave address

Function code

Data

Error check

The space between messages must meet the following conditions:

PLC to Inverter

Command message

Inverter to PLC

Response message

PLC to Inverter

Command message

Time

24 bits long

H5-06 setting

24 bits long

Fig 6.53 Message Spacing

5 ms min.

Slave Address

Set the address from 0 to 32. If set to 0, commands from the master will be received by all slaves. (Refer to

“Broadcast Data” on the following pages.)

Function Code

The function code specifies commands. The three function codes shown in the table below are available.

Command Message Response Message

Function Code

(Hexadecimal)

Function

Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes)

03H

08H

10H

Read memory register contents

Loopback test

Write multiple memory registers

Individual Functions

Data

Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.

Error Check

Errors during communications are detected using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method).

The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data-word (16 bit), which starting value is FFFH. The value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR- and SHIFT operations together with the data package that should be sent (slave address, function code, data) and the fixed value A001H. At the end of the calculation the data-word contains the checksum value.

The checksum is calculated in the following way:

1. The starting value of the 16 Bit data-word, that is used for the calculation, has to be set to FFFFH.

2. An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address.

3. The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1.

4. When this bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has to be performed.

5. After 8 shift operations (every time when the overflow bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to be done), perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data package (8 bit function code). Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation.

6. The same steps have to be performed with the data, first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte until all data are proceeded.

7. The result of these operations is the checksum. It consists of a high and a low byte.

The following example clarifies the calculation method. It shows the calculation of a CRC-16 code with the slave address 02H (0000 0010) and the function code 03H (0000 0011). The resulting CRC-16 code is 40H for the lower and D1H for the higher byte. The example calculation in this example is not done completely (normally data would follow the function code).

6-73

6-74

Calculations

1111 1111 1111 1111

0000 0010

1111 1111 1111 1101

0111 1111 1111 1110

1010 0000 0000 0001

1101 1111 1111 1111

0110 1111 1111 1111

1010 0000 0000 0001

1100 1111 1111 1110

0110 0111 1111 1111

0011 0011 1111 1111

1010 0000 0000 0001

1001 0011 1111 1110

0100 1001 1111 1111

0010 0100 1111 1111

1010 0000 0000 0001

1000 0100 1111 1110

0100 0010 0111 1111

0010 0001 0011 1111

1010 0000 0000 0001

1000 0001 0011 1110

0000 0011

1000 0001 0011 1101

0100 0000 1001 1110

1010 0000 0000 0001

1110 0000 1001 1111

0111 0000 0100 1111

1010 0000 0000 0001

1101 0000 0100 1110

0110 1000 0010 0111

0011 0100 0001 0011

1010 0000 0000 0001

1001 0100 0001 0010

0100 1010 0000 1001

0010 0101 0000 0100

1010 0000 0000 0001

1000 0101 0000 0101

0100 0010 1000 0010

1010 0000 0000 0001

1110 0010 1000 0011

0111 0001 0100 0001

1010 0000 0000 0001

1101 0001 0100 0000

D1H 40H

Higher Lower

Byte Byte

Overflow

Description

Initial value

Address

ExOr Result

Shift 1

ExOr Result

Shift 2

ExOr Result

Shift 3

Shift 4

ExOr Result

Shift 5

Shift 6

ExOr Result

Shift 7

Shift 8

ExOr Result

Function Code

ExOr Result

Shift 1

ExOr Result

Shift 2

ExOr Result

Shift 3

Shift 4

ExOr Result

Shift 5

Shift 6

ExOr Result

Shift 7

ExOr Result

Shift 8

ExOr Result

CRC-16 Result

Individual Functions

MEMOBUS Message Example

An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.

Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents

The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be readout at a time.

Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register that is to be read out and the quantity of registers that should be read out. The response message will contain the content of the first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity.

The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.

The following tables show message examples when reading status signals, fault details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.

Command Message

Slave Address

Function Code

Start

Address

Quantity

CRC-16

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

02H

03H

00H

20H

00H

04H

45H

F0H

Response Message

(During Normal Operation)

Slave Address

Function Code

02H

03H

Data quantity

1st storage register

Higher

Lower

Next storage register

Higher

Next storage register

Lower

Higher

Next storage register

Lower

Higher

Lower

Higher

CRC-16

Lower

08H

00H

65H

00H

01H

F4H

AFH

82H

Response Message

(During Error)

Slave Address

Function Code

02H

83H

Error code

Higher

CRC-16

Lower

03H

F1H

31H

6-75

6-76

Loopback Test

The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. A user-defined test code and data values can be set.

The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave no. 1.

Command Message

Slave address

Function code

Test Code

Data

CRC-16

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

01H

08H

00H

A5H

37H

DAH

8DH

Response Message

(During Normal Operation)

Slave address

Function code

01H

08H

Test Code

Data

CRC-16

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

00H

A5H

37H

DAH

8DH

Response Message

(During Error)

Slave address

Function code

01H

89H

Error Code

Higher

CRC-16

Lower

01H

86H

50H

Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers

The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process, i.e. the address of the first register that is to be written and the quantity of to be written registers must be set in the command message.

The to be written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message. The data order must be higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits. The data must be in memory register address order.

The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency reference of 60.0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H.

Command Message

Slave Address

Function Code

Start

Address

Higher

Lower

Higher

Quantity

Lower

No. of data

Lead data

Next data

CRC-16

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

Higher

Lower

00H

01H

02H

58H

63H

39H

01H

10H

00H

01H

00H

02H

04H

Response Message

(During Normal Operation)

Slave Address 01H

Function Code

Start

Address

Higher

Lower

Higher

Quantity

Lower

Higher

CRC-16

Lower

10H

00H

01H

00H

02H

10H

08H

Response Message

(During Error)

Slave Address 01H

Function Code

Error code

CRC-16

Higher

Lower

90H

02H

CDH

C1H

* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)

IMPORTANT

For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be used.

Individual Functions

Data Tables

The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast data.

Reference Data

The reference data table is shown below. These data can be read and written. They cannot be used for monitoring functions.

0000H

0001H

Reserved

Run operation and input commands

Bit 0

Bit 1

Run/stop command

Forward/reverse operation

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

External fault

Fault reset

ComNet

ComCtrl

Contents

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Multi-function input command 3

Multi-function input command 4

Multi-function input command 5

Multi-function input command 6

0006H

0007H

0008H

Bit A

Bits B to F

Multi-function input command 7

Not used

0002H Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)

0003H to 0005H Not used

PI target value

Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726)

→ 10V = 660

Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726)

→ 10V = 660

0009H

Multi-function digital output setting

Bit 0 Digital output 1 (Terminal M1-M2)

Bit 1

Bit 2

Digital output 2 (Terminal M3-M4)

Not used

Bits 3 to 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bits 8 to F

1: ON 0: OFF

Not used

Set fault relay (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7 1: ON 0: OFF

Fault relay (terminal MA-MC)

Not used

1: ON 0: OFF

000AH to 000EH Not used

Reference selection settings

Bit 0

Bit 1

Not used

Input PI target value

000FH

Bits 2 to B

Not used

Broadcast data terminal S5 input

Broadcast data terminal S6 input

Broadcast data terminal S7 input

Not used

1: Enabled 0: Disabled

Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.

6-77

6-78

Monitor Data

The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.

0010H

0011H

0012H

0013H

0014H

Contents

Inverter status signal

Bit 0 During run

Bit 1

Bit 2

Zero speed

During reverse operation

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Reset signal active

During speed agree

Inverter ready

Minor fault

Bit 7

Bits 8 to F

Operator status

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3, 4

Bit 5 to F

Major fault

Not used

During OPE alarm

During fault

Operator in programming mode

00: JVOP-160 attached, 01: JVOP-161 attached, 11: PC connected

Not used

OPE Fault Number

Not used

Fault Content 1

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit A

Bit B

Bit C

Bit D

Bit E

Bit F

PUF, DC bus fuse blown

UV1

UV2

UV3

Not used

GF, Ground fault

OC, Over current

OV, DC bus over voltage

OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm

OH1, Inverter heatsink overheat

OL1, Motor overload

OL2, Inverter overload

OL3, Overload detection

Not used

0015H

0016H

0017H

0018H

Contents

Fault Content 2

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

EF3, External fault set on terminal S3

EF4, External fault set on terminal S4

EF5, External fault set on terminal S5

EF6, External fault set on terminal S6 Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

EF7, External fault set on terminal S7

Not used

Not used Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit A

Not used

PF, Input phase loss

LF, Output open phase Bit B

Bit C

Bit D

Bit E

OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm (PTC analog input)

OPR, Digital operator disconnected

ERR, EEPROM fault

OH4, Motor overheat (PTC analog input) Bit F

Fault Content 3

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2/3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit A

CE, Memobus communications error

BUS, Bus option communications error

Not used

EF0, External fault from optional input card

FBL, PI feedback loss

LL3, Loss of Load detection

Not used

OL7, High Slip Braking overload

Bit B to F Not used

CPF Fault Content 1

Bit 0/1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Not used

CPF02

CPF03

Not used

Bit 5

Bit 6

CPF05

CPF06

Bit 7 to F Not used

CPF Fault Content 2

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4 to F

CPF20

CPF21

CPF22

CPF23

Not used

Individual Functions

6-79

6-80

0019H

001AH

001BH

0020H

Contents

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2 to F

Inverter status

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bits 8 to F

Alarm Content 2

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8 to A

Bit B

Bit C

Bit D

Bit E

Bit F

Alarm Content 3

Alarm Content 1

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit A

Bit B

Bit C

Bit D/E

Bit F

UV, DC bus undervoltage

OV, DC bus overvoltage

OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm

OH2, Inverter overheat alarm input by a digital input

OL3, Overload detection 1

Not used

EF, Forward/Reverse input set at the same time

BB, Baseblock active

EF3, External alarm set on terminal S3

EF4, External alarm set on terminal S4

EF5, External alarm set on terminal S5

EF6, External alarm set on terminal S6

EF7, External alarm set on terminal S7

Not used

OPR, Digital operator disconnected

CE, Memobus communications error

BUS, Bus option communications error

CALL, Communications on standby

OL1, Motor overload

OL2, Inverter overload

Not used

FBL, PI feedback loss

CALL, Communications on standby

UL3, Loss of Load detection

Not used

OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm

Not used

Forward operation

Reverse operation

Inverter startup complete

Fault

1: Completed 2: Not completed

1: Fault

Data setting error 1: Error

Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF

Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF

Not used

Individual Functions

0021H

0022H

0023H

0024H

0025H

0026H

0027H

0028H

0029H

002AH

002BH

Contents

Fault details

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Overcurrent (OC), Ground fault (GF)

Main circuit overvoltage (OV)

Inverter overload (OL2)

Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)

Not used

Fuse blown (PUF)

PI feedback lost (FbL)

External fault (EF, EFO) Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit A

Bit B

Bit C

Bit D

Bit E

Bit F

Data link status

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Control board fault (CPF)

Motor overload (OL1) or Overload (OL3) detected

Not used

Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected

Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply fault (UV2), inrush prevention circuit fault (UV3), power loss

Output phase loss (LF)

MEMOBUS communications error (CE)

Operator disconnected (OPR)

Writing data

Not used

Upper and lower limit errors

Data integrity error

Not used

Bit 4

Bits 5 to F

Frequency reference

Monitors U1-01

Output frequency Monitors U1-02

Output voltage Monitors U1-06

Output current Monitors U1-03

Output power Monitors U1-08

Not used

Control terminals input status

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Input terminal S1

Input terminal S2

Multi-function input terminal S3

Multi-function input terminal S4

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bits 7 to F

Multi-function input terminal S5

Multi-function input terminal S6

Multi-function input terminal S7

Not used

1: ON 0: OFF

6-81

6-82

002CH

Contents

Inverter status

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit A

Bit B

Bit C

Bit D

Bit E

Bit F

Operation

Zero speed

Frequency agree

User-defined speed agree

Frequency detection 1

Frequency detection 2

Inverter startup completed

Undervoltage detection

Baseblock

Frequency reference mode

Run command mode

Overload detection

Frequency reference lost

Restart enabled

1: During Operation

1: Zero speed

1: Agreement

1: Output frequency

≤ L4-01

1: Output frequency

≥ L4-01

1: Startup completed

1: Detected

1: Inverter output baseblock

1: By communication option

1: Detected

1: Lost

1: Restarting

Fault (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Fault occurred

MEMOBUS communications time-out

Multi-function digital output status

1: Timed out

002DH

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bits 3 to F

002EH - 0030H Not used

0031H DC bus voltage

0032H – 0037H Not used

Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF

Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF

Not used

0038H

0039H

PI feedback (max. output frequency = 100%; resolution 0.1%; without sign)

PI input (max. output frequency = 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)

003AH

003BH

003CH

003DH

003EH

PI output (max. output frequency = 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)

CPU software number

Flash software number

Communications error details

Bit 0

Bit 1

CRC error

Invalid data length

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Not used

Parity error

Overrun error

Framing error

Bit 6

Bits 7 to F kVA setting

Time-out

Not used

Note: Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (can also be reset during operation).

Individual Functions

Broadcast Data

Using broadcast data a command can be given to all slaves at the same time. The message must be addressed to 00H. All slaves will receive the message, but will not respond.

The following table shows the broadcast data. Theses data can also be written.

Address

Contents

0001H

0002H

Operation signal

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bits 2 and 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bits 6 to B

Bit C

Bit D

Bit E

Run command

Reverse operation command

Not used

External fault

Fault reset

Not used

Multi-function digital input terminal S5 input

Multi-function digital input terminal S6 input

Bit F

Frequency reference

Multi-function digital input terminal S7 input

Not used.

1: Operating 0: Stopped

1: Reverse 0: Forward

1: Fault

1: Reset command

Note: Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.

Inverter Fault Codes

The content of a current fault and faults that have occurred earlier can be read out by Memobus using the Fault

Trace (U2) and the Fault History (U3) parameters. The fault codes are shown in the table below.

Fault

Code

01H

0FH

10H

11H

12H

0BH

0CH

0DH

0EH

07H

08H

09H

0AH

02H

03H

04H

06H

Fault Description

EF3

EF4

OH1

OL1

OL2

OL3

PUF

UV1

UV2

UV3

Fault

Code

13H

22H

25H

26H

27H

1EH

1FH

20H

21H

1AH

1BH

1CH

1DH

14H

15H

18H

19H

Fault Description

OH3

OPR

ERR

OH4

BUS

EF0

EF5

EF6

EF7

Fault

Code

28H

91H

92H

93H

94H

88H

89H

8AH

8BH

84H

85H

86H

87H

29H

2AH

2BH

83H

Fault Description

CPF06

CPF07

CPF08

CPF09

CPF10

CPF20

CPF21

CPF22

CPF23

FBL

UL3

OL7

CPF02

CPF03

CPF04

CPF05

for detailed fault descriptions and for corrective actions.

6-83

6-84

ENTER Command

When writing parameters to the Inverter from the master using MEMOBUS communications the parameters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the Inverter. To enable these parameters the ENTER command must be used.

There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM and

ENTER commands that write data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as enabling the data in RAM.

The following table shows the registers used for ENTER commands. The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.

0900H

0910H

Contents

Write parameter data to EEPROM, RAM is refreshed

Parameter data are not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.

IMPORTANT

The maximum number of times it can be written to EEPROM is 100,000. Do not frequently execute

ENTER commands (0900H) that write into EEPROM.

The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers are read out, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).

Communications Error Codes

The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.

Error Code

01H

02H

Contents

Function code error

A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the master.

Invalid register number error

• The register address can not be accessed.

• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0001H, or 0002H has been set.

03H

21H

22H

23H

24H

Invalid quantity error

• The quantity of registers being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.

• In write mode, the number of data in the message is not quantity of registers x 2.

Data setting error

• A upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.

• When writing parameters, the parameter setting out of the setting range

Write mode error

• Attempting to write parameters to the Inverter during operation.

• Attempting to send an ENTER command during operation.

• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or o2-04 when warning alarm

CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.

• Attempting to write read-only data.

Writing during DC bus undervoltage (UV) error

• Writing parameters to the inverter during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.

• Sending ENTER commands during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.

Writing error during parameters processing.

Attempting to write parameters while other parameters in the Inverter are processed.

Individual Functions

Slave Not Responding

In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.

•

When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.

•

When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not match.

•

When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.

•

When the command message data length is invalid.

Application Precautions

IMPORTANT

If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.

Self-Diagnosis

The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing of the serial communication interface circuits. This function uses the interconnected send/receive terminals and emulates messages.

To perform the self-diagnosis function use the following procedure.

1. Switch ON the Inverter power supply, and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).

2. Switch OFF the Inverter power supply.

3. Perform the wiring according to

Fig 6.54

4. Switch ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)

5. Switch ON the inverter power supply.

Fig 6.54 Communication Terminals Wiring for Self-Diagnosis

If the serial port is working correctly the Digital Operator displays “PASS” on the display.

If an error occurs, a “CE” (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault digital output will be turned ON and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.

6-85

6-86

Using the Timer Function

The digital input and output terminals can be used with a timer function: A digital output is switched ON with a set delay time after a digital input has been switched ON.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name Description b4-01 b4-02

Timer function ON-delay time

Set the timer function output ON delay time (dead time) for the timer function input in 1-second units.

Enabled when a timer function is set in H1and H2.

Timer function OFF-delay time

Set the timer function output OFF delay time (dead time) for the timer function input in 1-second units.

Enabled when the timer function is set in H1and H2.

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

0.0 to

300.0

0.0 to

300.0

0.0 sec.

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

18 Timer function input

Function

Multi-Function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value

12 Timer function output

Function

Setting Example

When the timer function input remains switched ON for a time longer than the setting in b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input remains switched OFF for a time longer than the setting in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.

Timer function input

Timer function output

Fig 6.55 Timer Function Operation Example

Individual Functions

Using PI Control

PI control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value.

The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below.

P element

I element

The output of a P-element is proportional to the input (deviation). With using a P-element alone it is not possible to eliminate the deviation completely.

The output of an I-element is the time-integral of the input (deviation). With using a P-element and an

I-element together the deviation can be eliminated completely.

PID Control Operation

To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I the output share of each operation is shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is jumps to a certain value (step response).

Deviation

Time

PI control

Output of P- and

I-element

I control

P control

Time

Fig 6.56 PI Control Operation

PI Control Applications

The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter.

Application Control Details

Example of Sensor

Used

Pressure Control

Pressure information is fed back and constant pressure control is performed.

Flow Rate

Control

Temperature

Control

Flow rate information is fed back and the flow rate is controlled with high accuracy.

Temperature information is fed back and a temperature adjustment control using a fan can be performed.

Pressure sensor

Flow rate sensor

• Thermocouple

• Thermistor

6-87

6-88

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08 b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18 b5-19 b5-20

Proportional (P) gain

Integral (I) time

Integral (I) limit

PI limit

PI offset

PI delay time constant

PI output gain

PI Setpoint Selection

PI Setpoint

PI Setpoint Scaling

Name b5-01 PI control mode selection

PI output characteristics selection

PI reverse output selection b5-12 Selection of PI feedback signal loss detection b5-13 PI feedback loss detection level

PI feedback loss detection time

Sleep function operation level

Sleep operation delay time

Accel/decel time for PI reference b5-21 Sleep Function Selection b5-22 Snooze Level b5-23 Snooze Delay Time b5-24 Wake-Up Level b5-25 Setpoint Boost b5-26 Maximum Boost Time b5-27 Snooze feedback b5-28 PI Feedback Square Root Operation b5-29 PI Feedback Square Root Gain b5-30 PI Output Monitor Square Root b5-31 PI unit selection

Setting

Range

0, 1, 3

0.00

25.00

0.0 to

360.0

0.0 to

100.0

0.0 to

100.0

-100.0

+100.0

0.00 to

10.00

0 or 1

0.0 to

25.0

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 to 100

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

25.5

Factory

Setting

1.00

1.0 sec.

100.0%

0.0%

0.00 sec.

1.0

1.0 sec.

0.0 Hz

0.0 sec.

0 to 1

0.00 to

100.00

0 to

39999

1 to 2

0 to 100 0%

0 to 3600 0 sec.

0 to 100

0 to 3600 0 sec.

0 to 100 60%

0 or 1

0 to 2.00

0 or 1

0 to 11

1.00

Change during

Operation

Yes

Access

Level

*1. Parameter is moved into Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise the parameter is available only in Advanced

Programming Mode

Individual Functions

Monitor Items (U1-

Parameter

Number

U1-24

)

Name

PI feedback value

U1-36

U1-37

U1-38

U1-53

PI input volume

PI output volume

PI setpoint

PI feedback 2

Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)

Set Value

PI feedback

PI target value

PI differential feedback

Output Signal Level at Analog Output

10 V: 100% feedback

10 V: 100% PI input

10 V: 100% PI output

10 V: 100% PI target

10 V: 100% PI feedback

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)

PI control integral reset (ON: integral reset and hold as long as input is ON)

PI control integral hold (ON: integral is hold)

PI soft starter disable (ON: disabled)

PI input characteristics switch

Function

Unit

0.01%

6-89

6-90

PI Control Methods

There are two PI control methods. Select the method by setting parameter b5-01.

Set Value

Control Method

PI control disabled

PI output becomes directly the Inverter output frequency.

PI output is added to the frequency reference as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency.

When the PI control is enabled (b5-01=1 or 3) further changes to other parameter settings occur automatically.

Following parameters change their Access Level to Quick Access Level:

Parameter Number

H3-08

Name

Analog input A2 signal level selection

H3-09

H3-13 b5-31 b5-02 b5-03

Analog input A2 function selection

Terminal A1/A2 switching

PI unit selection

Proportional (P) gain

Integral (I) time

Access Level

Following parameters change their Default Setting:

Parameter Number

H3-09

Name

Analog input A2 function selection

Default Setting

PI Input Methods

PI Target Value Input Methods

Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PI target value, the PI target value can also be set as shown in the following table.

PI Target Input Method Setting Conditions

MEMOBUS register 0006H

Parameter setting

Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PI target value from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PI target value.

If b5-18 is set to 1 the value in b5-19 becomes the PI target value.

NOTE

If the PI function is used the frequency reference value becomes the target value, which is set and shown in Hz on the operator. Nevertheless, internally the PI target value is used in percent. I.e. the following formula is used:

PI target value [%] = frequency reference [Hz] max. output frequency [Hz]

• 100%

Individual Functions

PI Feedback Input Methods

Select one of the following PI control feedback input methods

Input Method

Analog input A2

Analog input A1

(Differential Mode)

Setting Conditions

Set H3-09 (Analog Input A2 Function Selection) to B (PI feedback).

(Default when PI control is enabled)

Set H3-09 to 16. Analog input A1 becomes the feedback 1 input and the analog input

A2 becomes the feedback 2 input.

If H3-09 is set to 16, the PI differential mode is activated. Both analog inputs (A1 and A2) become feedback inputs and the difference between both (A1 - A2) becomes the feedback value for the PI controller. The monitor U1-24 becomes the feedback 1 monitor, U1-53 becomes the feedback 2 monitor.

In PI differential mode the PI target value can be set using parameter b5-07 (PI offset or PI differential setpoint).

PI Adjustment Examples

Suppressing Overshoot

If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P), and increase integral time (I).

Response

Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition

To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I).

Response

Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration

If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.

Response

Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

6-91

6-92

Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration

If short cycle vibration occurs reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PI delay time constant.

Response

Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Setting Precautions

•

Parameter b5-04 is used to prevent the calculated integral value from exceeding a specified amount and so from saturated control. Otherwise, when the load varies rapidly the Inverter response is delayed and the machine might be damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.

•

Parameter b5-06 is used to prevent the output value of the PI control calculation from exceeding a specified amount.

•

Parameter b5-07 is used to adjust the PI control offset. It is added to the PI output value. When differential

PI feedback is selected (H3-09=16) parameter b5-07 becomes the PI Setpoint it is added to the difference between both feedback values.

•

Set the filter time constant for the PI control output in b5-08 to prevent machinery resonance when machinery friction is great or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the constant to a higher value than the resonance frequency oscillation period. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.

•

Parameter b5-09, the PI output polarity can be inverted. If now the PI target value increases the output frequency will be lowered. This function is usable e.g. for vacuum pumps.

•

Parameter b5-10 a gain can be applied to the PI control output. Enable this parameter to adjust the amount of compensation if the PI control output is added to the set frequency reference (b5-01 = 3).

•

Parameter b5-11 can be used to determine what happens to the inverter output when the PI control output is negative: Setting 0 will limit the PI control output to 0 while setting 1 will allow negative output values.

When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 or 3 (revers is disabled), however, the PI output is limited to 0.

•

Parameter b5-17 sets an accel./decel. ramp that raises/lowers the PI setpoint gradually (PI soft starter).

The normally used accel./decel. function (C1 parameters) is allocated after PI control so that, depending on the settings, resonance with the PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur. Using b5-17 this behaviour can be prevented.

The PI soft starter function can also be disabled or enabled using a digital input (H1 = 34).

PI Control Block

The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter.

Individual Functions

Fig 6.57 PI Control Block Diagram

6-93

6-94

PI Feedback Loss Detection

When performing PI control be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function. Otherwise, when the PI feedback gets lost, the Inverter output frequency may accelerate the motor to the maximum output frequency.

When b5-12 is set to 1 and the PI feedback value falls below the PI feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for a time longer than the PI feedback loss detection time (b5-14) a Fbl alarm (Feedback loss) will be displayed on the Digital Operator display and inverter operation is continued.

When the same happens and b5-12 is set to 2 a Fbl fault will be displayed on the display of the Digital Operator and the inverter operation will be stopped. The motor coasts to stop and the fault relay is operated.

The PI feedback loss function can be disabled by setting b5-12 to 0.

The time chart for PI feedback loss detection is shown below.

PI feedback value

Loss detection level

(b5-13)

Loss detection time

(b5-14)

No Fbl detection

Loss detection time’

(b5-14)

Fbl detection

Time

Fig 6.58 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart

PI Sleep Function

The PI sleep function can be used in two different modes which depends on the setting of b5-21.

If b5-21 is set to 0, the frequency reference/PI target value is the input value for the sleep function. If b5-21 is set to 1, the output frequency before the softstarter (SFS input) is becomes the sleep function input value.

If this value falls below the sleep level b5-15 for a longer time than the sleep operation delay time b5-16, the inverter output will be stopped. If the value comes back to a value higher than b5-15 for a time longer than b5-

16, the inverter will resume operation. See also following timing chart.

PI output/SFS input

Sleep operation level b5-15

Sleep operation delay time

Internal run command

External run command

Operating

Operation Stopped

Run command has been input

Operation status output

Fig 6.59 PI Sleep Timing Chart

The functionality of the sleep function is also available with deactivated PI controller.

Individual Functions

PI Snooze Function

By setting b5-21 to 2 the PI snooze function can be enabled. This software observes the PI feedback value and the output frequency (Softstarter output) to switch the Inverter ON and OFF automatically as the system requires.

•

Snooze Activation

The inverter stops operation when the output frequency (Softstarter output) falls below the snooze level b5-22 for a time longer than the snooze delay time b5-23 and when the feedback value is above the snooze feedback value in b5-27. Before stopping the inverter finally, the PI setpoint can be boosted up to temporarily over-satisfy the load and thereby to avoid a short cycle ON and OFF switching of the inverter. The boost level is set in parameter b5-25 and it is set as percentage of the PI setpoint value, but the maximum time for boost operation is set in b5-26.

•

Wake up

The inverter resumes the normal PI operation when the PI feedback falls below the wake up level b5-24.

The normal acceleration ramp is used.

PI Setpoint

Setpoint Boost (b5-25) time

PI Setpoint + b5-25

PI Feedback

Snooze Feedback Level (b5-27)

Wake-Up Level (b5-24)

SFS Output Freq.

time

Snooze Level

(b5-22) t < b5-23

Snooze Delay

(b5-23) normal decel.

ramp

Normal PI operation Boost Snooze normal accel.

ramp time

Normal PI operation

Fig 6.60 PI Snooze Time Chart

NOTE

Using the parameter b5-21 either sleep operation or snooze operation can be enabled. It is impossible to enable both functions at the same time.

6-95

6-96

Square Root Feedback Operation

If parameter b5-28 is set to 1 the feedback value is converted into a value that equals the square root of the actual feedback. This can be used for example to control the flow rate when a pressure sensor is used to generate a feedback value. With parameter b5-29 the square root can be multiplied with a factor. Following formula applies: flow rate = gain (b5-29)

× pressure (head)

So linear connection between the PI target value and the feedback can be realized.

With parameter b5-30 also the feedback monitor can be switched to show a square root value of the actual feedback.

Scaling of PI Parameters and Monitors with Units

The PI parameter b5-19 and the monitor parameters U1-24 and U1-38 can be scaled using parameter b5-20.

Following setting can be applied:

0.01 Hz units (default setting

0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 100%)

2 to 39: rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor poles)

40 to 39999: User desired display. Sets the maximum setting displayed using the setting rule in

Fig 6.61

Set the display at maximum frequency excluding the decimal point.

Set the number of digits displayed the decimal point.

Fig 6.61 PI Scaling Setting Rule

Example: When the max. PI value should be 200.0, set 12000: 2000 for the maximum display and 1 for the one digit behind the decimal point

Additional to the scaling also units can be displayed if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used.

The units are defined by parameter b5-31 and following units are available:

Setting

Value

Function

WC: Inch of water column

PSI: lb/square inch

GPM: Gallons per minute

F: Degree Fahrenheit

CFM: Cubic feet per minute

CMH: Cubic meter per hour

LPH: Liters per hour

LPS: Liters per second

Bar: Bar

Pa: Pascal

C: Degree Celsius

Mtr: Meters

Displayed Unit

PSI

GPM

CFM

CMH

LPH

LPS

Bar

Mtr

Individual Functions

Multifunction Digital Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)

PI Control Disable: 19

•

When a multi-function digital input is set for this function it can be used to disable the PI function by switching the input to ON.

•

The PI target value becomes the frequency reference value.

PI Control Integral Reset: 30

•

Using this function the integral value of the PI control can be reset by setting a multi-function digital input to ON.

•

It will remain at 0 as long as the input is ON.

PI Control Integral Hold: 31

•

Using this function the integral share value of the PI control can be hold by setting a multi-function digital input to ON. The value will be hold as long as the input is ON.

PI Soft Starter Disable: 34

•

To disable the PI soft starter temporarily switch ON the multi-function digital input.

PI Input Characteristic Switch: 35

•

Using this function the PI input characteristic can be inverted by switching the multi-function digital input

ON.

6-97

6-98

Energy-saving

When the Energy Saving Function is activated the output voltage is automatically lowered to run the motor at maximum efficiency.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient b8-05 Power detection filter time constant b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter

*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

0 or 1

0.0 to

655.00

0 to 2000 20 msec

0 to 100 0%

Change

During

Operation

Access

Level

Adjusting Energy-saving Control

•

To enable the energy saving function, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. The default setting is 0 (disabled).

•

b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is preset assuming that motor and inverter capacity are the same. Adjust b8-04 in steps of 5 % until the output power reaches its minimum. The higher the energy-saving coefficient, the higher is the output voltage.

•

To improve the responsiveness when the load fluctuates reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-

05. If b8-05 is set too small the motor rotations may become unstable under light load conditions.

•

Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Consequently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation varies the output voltage. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) limits the range for the voltage search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, a range of 100% is equal to 200 V and for 400 V Class Inverters a range of 100% is equal to 400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation voltage limiter.

Individual Functions

Setting Motor Parameters

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

E2-01

E2-03

E2-05

Motor rated current

Motor no-load current

Name

Motor line-to-line resistance

Setting

Range

0.32 to

6.40

0.00 to

1.89

0.000

65.000

Factory

Setting

1.90 A

1.2 A

9.842

Change during

Operation

*1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

*2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given

*3. The setting range is 0.00 A to (E1-01 - 0.01 A).

Access

Level

Manual Setting of the Motor Parameter

Motor Rated Current Setting

Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.

Motor No-Load Current Setting

Parameter E2-03 is measured automatically during motor line-to-line resistance auto-tuning. When auto-tuning can not be performed consult the motor manufacturer for the motor no-load current value.

Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting

Parameter E2-05 is measured automatically during motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When auto-tuning can not be performed, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula and then make the setting accordingly.

•

E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (

Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)

B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (

Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)

F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (

Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)

6-99

6-100

Setting the V/f Pattern

Using the E1 parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector control mode.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

E1-01

E1-03

E1-04

E1-05

E1-06

E1-07

E1-08

E1-09

E1-10

E1-11

E1-12

E1-13

Input voltage setting

V/f pattern selection

Max. output frequency (FMAX)

Max. output voltage (VMAX)

Base frequency (FA)

Mid. output frequency (FB)

Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)

Min. output frequency (FMIN)

Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)

Mid. output frequency 2

Mid. output frequency voltage 2

Base voltage (VBASE)

Name

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 to

255.0

155 to

255

0 to F, FF

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

255.0

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

200.0

0.0 to

255

200 V

0.0 V

50.0 Hz

200.0 V

50.0 Hz

2.5 Hz

15.0 V

1.2 Hz

9.0 V

0.0 Hz

0.0 V

*1. Values for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class Inverter the values have to be doubled.

*2. Parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled when set to 0.0

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Setting Inverter Input Voltage

Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage. The set value becomes a reference value for the stall prevention during deceleration and the overvoltage level according to the table below.

Inverter

Voltage Class

Input Voltage

Setting E1-01

OV Level

Stall Prevention during Decel Level

200 V 200 V 410 VDC 377 VDC

O 400 V

720 VDC 662 VDC

400 V

P 400 V

820 VDC 754 VDC

Setting V/f Pattern

The V/f pattern can be selected using parameter E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern:

Select one of the 15 preset pattern types (set value: 0 to E), or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).

The factory setting for E1-03 is F.

To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.

Individual Functions

Characteristic

Variable torque characteristic

High Startup

Torque

Application

Constant Torque

Characteristic

These patterns are used in general applications where the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, e.g. for linear transport systems.

These patterns are used for loads with torque proportional to the square or cube of the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.

Select a high startup torque V/f pattern only in the following cases.

• The wiring distance between Inverter and motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)

• A large torque is required at startup

• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter input or output.

Set

Value

Specifications

0 (F) 50 Hz specifications

60 Hz specifications

60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at

50 Hz

72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at

60 Hz

50 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic

50 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic

60 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic

60 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic

50 Hz specifications, medium startup torque

50 Hz specifications, large startup torque

60 Hz specifications, medium startup torque

B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque

Field Weakening

Operation

This pattern is used for frequencies of

60 Hz or higher. From the voltage saturation point on (in the field weakening area) the output voltage is fixed to the maximum output voltage.

90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at

60 Hz

120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at

60 Hz

180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at

60 Hz

Without Limits

With this pattern the voltage and frequency values can be set to any desired value, without limitations.

50 Hz specifications, without parameter limits.

*1. Usually sufficient starting torque is provided by the torque compensation function (automatic torque boost at low speed)

When one of these patterns is selected the values of parameters E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically.

There are three different sets of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.

•

0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern

•

2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern

•

55 to 300 kW V/f pattern

The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.

6-101

0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class Inverter. For a 400 V class Inverter, multiply all voltages with 2.

•

Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

1.3 2.5

1.5

1.5 3

•

Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6

1.5 3

60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

1.3

•

High startup torque (Set value 8: to B)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz

1.5

Set Value A

1.5

60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

6-102

1.3 2.5

1.5

•

Field Weakening Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz

1.5

Set Value E 180 Hz

1.5

Individual Functions

2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class Inverter. For a 400 V class Inverter, multiply all voltages with 2.

•

Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

•

Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

•

High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

•

Field Weakening Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz

6-103

6-104

55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class Inverter. For a 400 V class Inverter, multiply all voltages with 2.

•

Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

•

Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

•

High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

•

Field Weakening Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz

Individual Functions

NOTE

When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern) parameters E1-04 to E1-10 can be set. If E1-03 is set to anything other than F, parameters E1-04 to E1-13 can only be read. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.

Output voltage (V)

Frequency (Hz)

Fig 6.62 User-Set V/f Pattern

Setting Precautions

When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:

•

Parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0 by default in all V/f patterns. If E1-03 is set to F they can be set to obtain another point defining the V/f pattern.

•

Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:

E1-04 (FMAX)

≥ E1-11 (FMID2) > E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

6-105

6-106

Motor Preheat Function

The motor preheat function can be used to prevent e.g. moisture inside the motor due to condensation. Two different current levels are available. The preheat currents can be set in parameters b2-09 and b2-10 as a percentage of the Inverter rated current. Both functions are enabled by digital inputs. If the Drive Enable (H1-

=6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1=70) function is used the motor preheat function 2 has to be used, the preheat function 2 can then also be activated without enabling the drive.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number b2-09 Motor preheat current 1

Name

Setting

Range

0 to 100

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

A b2-10 Motor preheat current 2 0 to 10 5% No A

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Function Set value

Motor preheat 1

Motor preheat 2

The time chart for motor preheat is shown below.

Motor preheat

RUN

Output frequency

E1-09 b2-01 b2-03

Output current b2-02 b2-09

Motor preheat

Fig 6.63 Motor Preheat Function 1 Time Chart b2-04

Motor preheat

Individual Functions

(Bypass)

Drive Enable

Motor preheat

RUN

Output frequency

E1-09 b2-01 b2-03 b2-04

Output current b2-02 b2-09

Motor preheat

Fig 6.64 Motor Preheat Function 2 Time Chart

Motor preheat

Setting Precautions

•

If the Motor Preheat command 1 and the Motor Preheat Command 2 are set simultaneously an OPE3 alarm will occur.

•

If Motor Preheat command 1 and Drive Enable or Bypass Drive Enable are set simultaneously an OPE3 alarm will occur. Motor Preheat 2 has to be used instead.

•

During motor preheat operation the Digital Operator display will show PRHT alarm.

6-107

6-108

Emergency Override Function

The emergency override function is used as a “smoke purge function. It will run the motor at the preset emergency override speed or at AUTO frequency reference in forward or reverse direction. See Fig for a timing chart.

Drive Enable*

Emergency Override

Run command

Emergency Override

Reference**

Output frequency

* Applies for Drive Enable (H1-xx=6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1-xx=70)

** Either b1-14 or AUTO reference, depending on b1-15 setting

Fig 6.65 Timing Chart for Emergency Override Function

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name b1-14 Emergency override speed b1-15 Emergency override reference selection

Setting

Range

0 to

200.00

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

0.00 Hz

Change during

Operation

0 No

Access

Level

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

Function

Emergency override forward (ON: Emergency override in forward direction)

Emergency override reverse (ON Emergency in override in reverse direction)

Setting and Application Precautions

•

An OPE3 alarm will occur when emergency override forward and emergency override reverse are programmed to digital inputs simultaneously.

•

During emergency override the Digital Operator display will show OVRD alarm.

•

When the HOA Digital Operator is used, the OFF key is disabled during Emergency Override if any of the multi-function inputs are programmed to Drive Enable (H1-xx=6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1-xx=70), in both HAND and AUTO Mode.

•

If a RUN or jog input is closed but the Drive Enable / Bypass Drive Enabled input is open, the Inverter will display a “DNE Drive not Enable” alarm and the STOP LED will blink. When the Emergency Override input is closed, the alarm display will change to “OVRD Emergcy Override”, the RUN LED will turn ON and the STOP LED will turn OFF again.

Individual Functions

High Slip Braking

The High Slip Braking function can shorten the deceleration times without using a braking option for emergency stops for example.

The function must be activated by a multifunction digital input.

Note the following:

•

The HSB function is not comparable with the normal deceleration function. It does not use a ramp function.

•

HSB should not be used at normal operation instead of a deceleration ramp.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name n3-01 High Slip braking deceleration frequency width n3-02 High Slip braking current limit n3-03 High Slip braking stop dwell time n3-04 High Slip braking OL7 time

Setting

Range

1 to 20

100 to

200

0.0 to

10.0

30 to

1200

Factory

Setting

150%

1.0 sec.

40 sec.

Change during

Operation

Access

Level

Adjusting the HSB Deceleration Frequency Width (N3-01)

This parameter sets the step value (in percent of maximum output frequency) that is used for lowering the output frequency to achieve a large negative slip and thereby to brake the motor.

Normally no adjustments should be necessary. Increase the value if DC bus overvoltage faults occur.

Adjusting the HSB Current Limit (N3-02)

The setting of parameter N3-02 limits the output current while high slip braking is active. The current limit affects the achievable deceleration time. The parameter is set in percent of the motor rated current setting.

The lower the current limit the longer is the deceleration time.

Setting the HSB Dwell Time at Stop (N3-03)

At the end of a high slip braking the output frequency is held at the minimum output frequency for the time set in N3-03. Increase the time if the motor coasts after HSB.

Setting the HSB Overload Time (N3-04)

N3-04 sets the HSB overload time. If the output frequency does not change for any reason although an HSB command is given, an OL7 fault will be displayed and the fault relay will operate.

Activating High Slip Braking

If one of the multifunction inputs is set to “68” it can be used to activate the HSB function. The Inverter will brake the motor immediately after the HSB command was given. As the HSB function is activated by the positive edge of digital input signal HSB cannot be stopped, i.e. normal inverter operation cannot be resumed.

6-109

6-110

Digital Operator Functions

Setting Digital Operator Functions

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number o1-01 o1-02 o1-03

Monitor selection

Name

Monitor selection after power up

Digital operator display scaling o1-09

Frequency reference display unit selection

*2 o2-01

LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable

*3 o2-02

STOP key during control circuit terminal operation

o2-03 User parameter initial value o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection o2-06

Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected

Setting

Range

6 to 53

1 to 4

0 to

39999

0 to 11

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

Access

Level

A o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10

Cumulative operation time setting

Cumulative operation time selection

Initialize Mode

Fan operation time setting o2-12 Fault trace initialize o2-14 kWh monitor initialize o2-15

HAND Key function selection

0 to

65535

0 or 1

1 to 5

0 to

65535

0 or 1

0 hrs

0 hr.

*1. This parameter is effective only when the LED Digital Operator is used.

*2. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator).

*3. This parameter is effective only when the LED or LCD Digital Operator is used.

*4. This parameter is effective only when the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used

Monitor Selection (o1-01)

Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is directly displayed in Drive Mode can be selected. This parameter is only effective when the LED Digital Operator is used.

Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)

Using parameter o1-02 the monitor item (U1supply is turned ON can be selected.

) that is displayed on the Digital Operator when the power

Digital Operator Functions

Changing Frequency Reference Scaling (o1-03)

The frequency monitors can be scaled using parameter o1-03. The scaling will be applied to following monitor items and parameters:

•

U1-01 (Frequency reference)

•

U1-02 (Output frequency)

•

U1-05 (Motor speed)

•

U1-20 (Output frequency after soft starter)

•

d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17 (Frequency references)

The following scaling settings can be applied:

0: 0.01 Hz units (default setting

2 to 39:

0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 100%) rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor poles)

40 to 39999: User desired display. Sets the maximum setting displayed using the setting rule in

Fig 6.66

Set the display at maximum frequency excluding the decimal point.

Set the number of digits displayed the decimal point.

Fig 6.66 Frequency Scaling Setting Rule

Example: When the max. output frequency value should be 200.0, set 12000: 2000 for the maximum display and 1 for the one digit behind the decimal point

Changing Frequency Reference Display Units (o1-09)

Additional to the scaling also units can be displayed if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used.

The units are defined by parameter o1-09 and following units are available:

Setting

Value

Function

WC: Inch of water column

PSI: lb/square inch

GPM: Gallons per minute

F: Degree Fahrenheit

CFM: Cubic feet per minute

CMH: Cubic meter per hour

LPH: Liters per hour

LPS: Liters per second

Bar: Bar

Pa: Pascal

C: Degree Celsius

Mtr: Meters

Displayed Unit

PSI

GPM

CFM

CMH

LPH

LPS

Bar

Mtr

6-111

6-112

Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)

Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the LED or LCD Digital Operator.

If the key is disabled, it cannot be used anymore to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN command source between Digital Operator and the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.

Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)

This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the LED or LCD Digital Operator is active during remote control (b1-02

≠ 0) or not.

If o2-02 is set to 1 a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted, the Inverter will stop according to the method set in parameter b1-03 (Stopping method). If o2-02 is set to 0 it will be disregarded.

Initializing Changed Parameter Values (o2-03)

The current Inverter parameter setting values can be saved as user-set parameter values. Therefore parameter o2-03 has to be set to 1.

To initialize the Inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory parameter A1-03 has to be set to 1110. To clear the user-set initial values in memory set o2-03 to 2.

Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the

Enter Key (o2-05)

This function is active when the frequency reference is input from any Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to

1 and the frequency reference is input via any Digital Operator the reference can be incremented or decremented using the UP and DOWN keys directly, pressing the ENTER button is not necessary.

Operation Selection when the Digital Operator is Disconnected (o2-06)

Parameter o2-06 selects whether a fault is detected when the Digital Operator is disconnected from the

Inverter.

If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.

If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop, the fault relay is operated and the

Digital Operator Display shows an OPR fault when reconnected.

Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)

The Inverter counts its operation time cumulatively.

Using parameter o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 1.

Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)

This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.

Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.

Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)

This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1. All previously stored faults are deleted.

Energy Monitor Initialize (o2-14)

This function can be used to initialize the energy monitor by setting parameter o2-14 to 1.

Digital Operator Functions

HAND Key Function Selection (o2-15)

With this parameter the HAND key can be enabled by setting parameter o2-15 to 1. The factory setting is 0,

HAND key disabled. The parameter is effective only, if the optional HOA Digital Operator is used.

Standard / IP54 Selection (o2-17)

This parameter selects whether the Inverter is of protection class IP00 / NEMA 1 / IP20 (setting 0) or IP54

(setting 1). Whenever an Inverter in protection IP54 class is used o2-17 has to be set to 1. This switches the carrier frequency and temperature limit parameters to appropriate values.

Copying Parameters

The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM

•

Store 1 Inverter parameter set in the Digital Operator (READ)

•

Write 1 Inverter parameter set from the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)

•

Compare 1 Inverter parameter set stored in the Digital Operator with the Inverter parameters settings

(VERIFY)

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

Name Description

Setting

Range

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Access

Level o3-01 Copy function selection o3-02 Read permitted selection

0: Normal operation

1: READ (Inverter to Operator)

2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)

3: Verify (compare)

0: READ prohibited

1: READ permitted

Refer to the following pages for the procedures for using the copy function.

0 to 3

0 or 1

6-113

6-114

Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)

To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method.

Step

No.

Digital Operator Display

LED Digital Operator LCD/HOA Digital Operator

Explanation

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

Press the MENU key until the Advanced Programming Mode is reached.

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00=1

Select Language

-ADV-

COPY Function o3 - 01=0

Copy Funtion Sel

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0

COPY SELECT

*0*

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 1

*0*

INV OP READ

-ADV-

READ

INV OP READING

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Function Selection Display in Advanced Programming Mode.

Scroll to parameter o3-01 (Copy Function

Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement key.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the

Parameter Setting Display.

Change the set value to 1 using the Increment key.

Press the DATA/ENTER key. The READ function will start.

-ADV-

READ

READ COMPLETE

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0

COPY SELECT

*0*

When the READ function is completed “End” respectively “Read Complete” is displayed on the Digital Operator for appr. 1 second. Then the display returns to the Monitor Display and parameter o1-03 is automatically reset to 0.

If a fault is displayed press any key to clear the fault display and return to the o3-01 display. Fault displays and their meanings are shown below.

Select READ Prohibited

This function prevents overwriting of the data that are stored in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator. When o3-02 is set to 0 and o3-01 is set to 1 to perform a write operation PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the write operation will be stopped.

If it is safe to overwrite the parameter set stored in the Digital Operator set o3-02 to 1 and start the READ function again by setting o3-01 to 1.

Digital Operator Functions

Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)

To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, use the following method.

Step

No.

Digital Operator Display

LED Digital Operator LCD/HOA Digital Operator

Explanation

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

Press the MENU key until the Advanced Programming Mode is reached.

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00 = 1

Select Language

-ADV-

COPY Function o3 - 01 = 0

Copy Funtion Sel

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0

*0*

COPY SELECT

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 2

*0*

OP INV WRITE

-ADV-

COPY

OP INV COPYING

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Function Selection Display in Advanced Programming Mode.

Scroll to parameter o3-01 (Copy Function

Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement key.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the

Parameter Setting Display.

Change the set value to 2 using the Increment key.

Press the DATA/ENTER key. The COPY function will start.

-ADV-

COPY

COPY COMPLETE

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0

COPY SELECT

*0*

If the COPY function is completed “End” respectively “Copy Complete” is displayed on the Digital Operator. Then the display returns to the Monitor Display and parameter o1-03 is automatically reset to 0.

If a fault is displayed press any key to clear the fault display and return to the o3-01 display. Fault displays and their meanings are shown on the following page.

6-115

6-116

Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)

To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, use the following method.

Step

No.

Digital Operator Display

LED Digital Operator LCD/HOA Digital Operator

-ADV-

** Main Menu **

Programming

Explanation

Press the MENU key until the Advanced Programming Mode is reached.

-ADV-

Initialization

A1 - 00 = 1

Select Language

-ADV-

COPY Function o3

- 01=0

Copy Funtion Sel

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0

*0*

COPY SELECT

-ADV-

Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 3

*0*

OP INV VERIFY

-ADV-

VERIFY

DATA VERIFYING

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Function Selection Display in Advanced Programming Mode.

Scroll to Parameter o3-01 (Copy Function

Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement key.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the

Parameter Setting Display.

Change the set value to 3 using the Increment key.

Press the DATA/ENTER key. The VERIFY function will start.

-ADV-

VERIFY

VERIFY COMPLETE

-ADV-

Copy Function Sel o3 01 = 0

COPY SELECT

*0*

When the VERIFY function is completed

“End” respectively “Verify Complete is displayed on the Digital Operator for appr. 1 second. Then the display returns to the Monitor

Display and parameter o1-03 is automatically reset to 0.

If an fault is displayed, press any key to cancel the fault display and return to the o3-01 display. Fault displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to

Chapter 7, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults

Application Precautions

When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the

Digital Operator.

•

Inverter product and type

•

Software number

•

Inverter capacity and voltage

Digital Operator Functions

Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator

If A1-01 is set to 0 only the parameters A1-01 and A1-04 are displayed and can be set, U1-

U3 are displayed.

, U2-

are displayed and can be set, U1-

and

, U2If A1-01 is set to 1 only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2-

and U3 are displayed.

If A1-01 is set to 2 all parameters are displayed and can be set.

When the parameter write enable function is programmed to one of the multi-function digital inputs (H1-

=1B) all parameters are write protected as long as this digital input is switched OFF. The moment it is switched ON the parameters can be changed.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

A1-01 Parameter access level

Name

Setting

Range

0 to 2

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

Access

Level

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value

1B Parameters write enable

Function

Setting a Password

When a password is set in A1-05, and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can not be modified.

The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited by using the password function in combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only): As long as A1-04 does not match A1-05 parameter A1-01 can not be changed.

To set a password parameter A1-05 has to be accessed in following way:

Scroll to A1-04, hold the Shift/RESET key pressed and press the MENU key additional. A1-05 will be displayed and the Setting Display can be entered.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

A1-01 Parameter access level

Name

A1-04 Password

A1-05 Password setting

Setting

Range

0 to 2

0 to

9999

0 to

9999

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

Yes

Access

Level

0 No A

6-117

6-118

Displaying User-set Parameters Only

The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a parameter set that contains only the most important parameters.

Set the of the parameters to which A2-01 to A2-32 should refer to and then set A1-01 to 1. In Advanced Programming Mode now only the parameters assigned to A2-01 to A2-32 are displayed and can be changed.

Related Parameters

Parameter

Number

A2-01 to

A2-32

User-set parameters

Name

Setting

Range b1-01 to o3-02

Factory

Setting

Change during

Operation

– No

Access

Level

Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for Inverter and motor problems.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions..................................7-2

Troubleshooting ...............................................................7-15

7-2

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.

Fault Detection

When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault relay operates, and the Inverter output is switched OFF causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the

Digital Operator.

When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify the fault and to correct the causes.

Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter:

•

Set a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and switch the input ON.

•

Press the Shift/RESET key on the Digital Operator.

•

Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.

•

To reset a fault it is necessary to witch OFF the RUN command.

Table 7.1 Fault Detection

Display

Over Current

Ground Fault

PUF

DC Bus Fuse Open

DC Bus Overvolt

Overcurrent

The Inverter’s output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.

Meaning

Ground Fault

The ground fault current at the

Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current and L8-09=1

(Ground fault detection enabled)

Probable Causes

Shorted Inverter output phase-tophase, shorted motor, locked rotor, load too heavy, accel/decel time too short, contactor on the

Inverter output has opened or closed, a special motor or a motor with a rated current larger than the Inverter’s output current is used.

Corrective Actions

• Remove the motor and run the Inverter without motor

• Check the motor for a phase to phase short.

• Check the Inverter for a phase to phase short at the output.

• Verify the accel/decel time settings

One Inverter output was shorted to ground and/or a DCCT is defective.

• Remove the motor and run the Inverter without motor.

• Check the motor for a phase to ground short.

• Check the output current with a clampmeter to verify the DCCT reading.

DC Bus Fuse Blown

The fuse in the main circuit is open.

Warning:

Never run the Inverter after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components

Shorted Inverter output and/or damaged IGBTs

• Check the motor and motor cables for short circuits or insulation failures (phase to phase

• Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.

DC Bus Overvoltage

The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.

page 6-100

for the OV detection level.

• The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.

• The power supply voltage is too high.

• Increase the deceleration time settings (C1-02/04/09) or connect a braking option.

• Check the power supply voltage and decrease the voltage to meet the

Inverter’s specification.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Display

UV1

DC Bus Undervolt

UV2

CTL PS Undervolt

UV3

MC Answerback

Input Phase Loss

Heatsink Overtemp

Table 7.1 Fault Detection

Meaning

DC Bus Undervoltage

The DC bus voltage is below the

Undervoltage Detection Level

(L2-05). The default settings are:

200 V class: 190 VDC

400V class: 380VDC

Main Circuit MC Operation

Failure

The MC stopped responding during Inverter operation. (Applicable Inverter Capacities

200 V class: 37 to 110 kW

400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)

Probable Causes Corrective Actions

• The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high.

• A momentary power loss has occurred.

• The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose.

• An open-phase error occurred at the input terminals.

• The acceleration time is set too short.

• A fault occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit.

• Check the input voltage.

• Check the wiring of the input terminals.

• Increase the accel time settings C1-01/03.

• In case of Main Circuit MC

Operation Failure replace the Inverter.

Control Power Supply

Undervoltage

Undervoltage of the control circuit while the Inverter was running.

An external load at the control terminals was pulling down the

Inverter’s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power/gate drive board.

• Remove all connections to the control terminals and cycle the power to the

Inverter.

• Replace the Inverter.

Inrush Current Prevention Circuit

Fault

An overheating of the charging resistor for the DC bus capacitors occurred.

The contactor of the inrush current prevention circuit is defective.

The MC of the charging circuit did not respond 10 sec. after the

MC ON signal has been output.

(Applicable Inverter Capacities:

200 V class: 37 to 110 kW

400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)

• Cycle the power to the

Inverter.

• Replace the Inverter

Main Circuit Voltage Fault

An unusual big ripple on the DC bus voltage has been detected.

Only detected when L8-05=1, the detection level is set by L8-06

(refer to

page 6-48

)

• An open-phase occurred in the input power supply.

• A momentary power loss occurred.

• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.

• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too high.

• The voltage balance between the phases is bad.

• Tighten the input terminal screws

• Replace the Inverter

Heatsink Overheat

The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 while L8-03 = 0 to 2.

Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped

• The ambient temperature is too high.

• There is a heat source nearby.

• The Inverter's cooling fan(s) stopped.

• The Inverter's internal cooling fan has stopped and L8-32=1

• Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.

• Install a cooling unit.

• Remove the heat source.

• Replace the cooling fan(s)

OH1

Heatsnk MAX Temp

Heatsink Overheat

The temperature of the Inverter’s heatsink exceeded 105 °C

Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped

• The ambient temperature is too high.

• There is a heat source nearby.

• The Inverter's cooling fan(s) stopped.

• The Inverter's internal cooling fan has stopped.and L8-32=1

• Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.

• Install a cooling unit.

• Remove the heat source.

• Replace the cooling fan(s)

7-3

7-4

Display

OH3

Motor Overheat 1

Table 7.1 Fault Detection

Meaning

Motor Overheat

Detected when the level at A2, programmed for motor temperature (thermistor input, H3-09=E), exceeds 1.17 V for the time L1-

05 and L1-03 = 0 to 2.

Probable Causes

Overheating of the motor has been measured by the motor thermistor.

Corrective Actions

• Check the cycle time and the size of the load.

• Check the accel/decel times

(C1).

• Check the V/f pattern

(E1)

OH4

Motor Overheat 4

Motor Overheat

Detected when the level at A2, programmed for motor temperature (thermistor input, H3-09=e), exceeds 2.34 V for the time L1-

05.

Overheating of the motor has been measured by the motor thermistor.

• Check the cycle time and the size of the load.

• Check the accel/decel times

(C1).

• Check the V/f pattern

(E1)

OL1

Motor Overload

OL2

Inv Overload

OL3

Overtorque Det 1

OL7

HSB OL

LL3

Loss of Load Det

FBL

Feedback Loss

Motor Overload

Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and the Inverter’s output current exceeded the motor overload curve.

Refer to

page 6-33

for parameter settings.

• The load is too large. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are too short.

• The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application

• The setting of the Motor Rated

Current (E2-01) is incorrect.

• Check the cycle time, the size of the load and the accel/decel time settings

(C1).

• Check the setting of the V/f pattern (E1).

• Check the setting of Motor

Rated Current (E2-01)

Inverter Overload

The internally calculated I²t value

(based on the Inverter rated current) has exceeded its detection level.

• The load is too large. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are too short.

• The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application

• The capacity of the Inverter is too small

• Check the cycle time, the size of the load and the accel/decel time settings

(C1).

• Check the setting of the V/f pattern (E1).

• Check the setting of Motor

Rated Current (E2-01)

• Check if the Inverter rated current matches the motor rated current.

Overload Detection

Inverter’s output current exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in L6-03 and L6-

01=3 or 4.

Motor was overloaded

• Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate

• Check the application/ machine status to eliminate fault.

High Slip Braking OL

The output frequency stayed constant for longer than the time set in n3-04 during High Slip Braking.

The inertia of the load is too large.

• Make sure the load is an inertial load.

• If possible, reduce the load inertia

Loss of Load Detection

Inverter’s output current was below L6-02 for longer then the time set in L6-03 and

L6-01= 7 or 8.

Motor lost its load

• Make sure that the settings in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.

• Check the mechanical system (mechanical connection of the load, e.g. belt).

PI Feedback Lost

This fault occurs when PI feedback loss detection is programmed to fault (b5-12

= 2) and the PI feedback fell below the PI

Feedback Loss Detection Level

(b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss

Detection Time (b5-14)

PI feedback source (e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) is not installed correctly or is not working

• Check the PI feedback signal source for correct operation.

• Check the wiring of the PI feedback signal.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Display

EF0

External Fault

Meaning

External fault input from Communications Option Card

(F6-03=1 to 2)

Table 7.1 Fault Detection

Probable Causes

An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.

Corrective Actions

• Check for an external fault condition

• Verify the parameters

• Verify communication signals

EF3

Ext Fault S3

External fault at terminal S3

EF4

Ext Fault S4

External fault at terminal S4

EF5

Ext Fault S5

External fault at terminal S5

An "external fault" was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to S7).

Remove the cause of the external fault.

EF6

Ext Fault S6

External fault at terminal S6

External fault at terminal S7

EF7

Ext Fault S7

OPR

Oper Disconnect

Digital Operator Connection

Fault

Detected when the Digital Operator is removed and if o2-06 = 1.

Memobus Com Err

MEMOBUS Communication

Fault

Detected when control data was not received correctly for 2 seconds and H5-04=0 to 3 and H5-

05=1.

The Digital Operator has been disconnected from the Inverter.

Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.

• Check the connection to the

Digital Operator.

• Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.

BUS

Option Com Err

CPF00

COM-

ERR(OP&INV)

CPF01

COM-

ERR(OP&INV)

Option Communication Fault

After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.

Connection is broken and/or the master as stopped the communication.

Digital Operator Communication

Fault 1

Communication with the Digital

Operator could not be established within 5 seconds after the power was supplied to the Inverter.

• The Digital Operator's cable was not securely connected.

• Digital Operator is defective.

• Control board is defective

• Check the connections and al user-side software configurations.

• Disconnect the Digital

Operator and then connect it again.

• Replace the Inverter.

• Cycle the Inverter power supply.

• Replace the Inverter.

CPU External RAM Fault

Digital Operator Communication

Fault 2

After communication with the

Digital Operator was established the communication stopped for 2 seconds or more.

• The Digital Operator's cable was not securely connected.

• Digital Operator is defective.

• Control board is defective

• Disconnect the Digital

Operator and then connect it again.

• Replace the Inverter.

• Cycle the Inverter power supply.

• Replace the Inverter.

7-5

7-6

Display

CPF02

BB Circuit Err

Meaning

Table 7.1 Fault Detection

Probable Causes

Baseblock Circuit Fault

A baseblock circuit error occurred at power-up.

Gate array hardware failure at power-up.

CPF03

EEPROM Error

EEPROM Fault

Checksum is not valid.

Noise or spikes was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

Corrective Actions

CPF04

Internal A/D Err

CPU Internal A/D Converter

Fault

Noise or spikes was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

CPF05

External A/D Err

CPU External A/D Converter

Fault

CPF06

Option Error

Noise or spikes was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

Option Card Connection Error

• The Option Card is not connected properly.

• The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.

• Try to initialize the Inverter.

• Cycle the Inverter power.supply.

• Replace the Inverter.

ASIC Internal RAM Fault The control circuit is damaged.

CPF07

RAM-Err

Watchdog Timer Fault The control circuit is damaged.

CPF08

WAT-Err

CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis

Fault

The control circuit is damaged.

CPF09

CPU-Err

ASIC Version Fault The control circuit is damaged.

CPF10

ASIC-Err

CPF20

Option A/D Error

Communications Option Card

A/D Converter Fault

• The Option Card is not connected properly.

• The Option Card's A/D converter is faulty.

• Turn off the power and reinstall the option board.

• Remove all inputs from the option board.

• Try to initialize the Inverter.

• Cycle the power to the

Inverter.

• Replace the Option Board.

• Replace the Inverter.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Display

CPF21

Option CPU Down

CPF22

Option Type Err

CPF23

Option DPRAM Err

Self-Diagnosis Fault of Option

Board

Option Board Interconnection

Fault

Meaning

Option Board Code Number

Fault

Table 7.1 Fault Detection

Probable Causes Corrective Actions

Noise or spikes was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.

Unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board.

An option board was not correctly connected to the control board or an option board that was not made for the Inverter is attached to the control board.

• Turn off the power and reinstall the option board.

• Remove all inputs from the option board.

• Try to initialize the Inverter.

• Cycle the power to the

Inverter.

• Replace the Option Board.

• Replace the Inverter.

7-7

7-8

Alarm Detection

Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault relay output. The system will automatically return to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.

The Digital Operator display and the Alarm LED flashes and the alarm can be output at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 or H2-02). As long as the Inverter remains in Alarm status it can not be started and will not accept parameter changes.

When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.

Table 7.2 Alarm Content

Display

(flashing)

External Fault

(flashing)

DC Bus Undervolt

(flashing)

DC Bus Overvolt

(flashing)

Meaning

Forward/Reverse Run Commands Input Together

Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500 msec or more.

This alarm will decelerate the motor stop

Probable Causes

The external forward and reverse command were input simultaneously.

Corrective Actions

Check external sequence logic, so only one input is received at a time.

DC Bus Undervoltage

The DC bus voltage is below the

Undervoltage Detection Level

(L2-05). The default settings are:

200 V class: 190 VDC

400 V class: 380 VDC

The MC of the inrush current prevention circuit opened.

The control power supply voltage was below the CUV level.

• The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high.

• A momentary power loss has occurred.

• The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose.

• An open-phase error occurred at the input terminals.

• The acceleration time is set too short.

• A fault occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit.

• An external load at the control terminals was pulling down the

Inverter’s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power/gate drive board.

• Check the input voltage.

• Check the wiring of the input terminals.

• In case of Main Circuit MC

Operation Failure replace the Inverter.

• Remove all connections to the control terminals and cycle the power to the

Inverter.

• Replace the Inverter.

DC Bus Overvoltage

The DC bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.